Road Lab

‫ﻣﺧﺗﺑر اﻟطرق‬
ROAD QUALITY CONTROL

ASPECTS, SAMPLING, TESTING, AND
RESULTS INTERPRETATION
Prepared by
Eng. A. KOURD
Materials & Soil Labs Director ‐ Islamic University
Quality Control & Quality Assurance
ROAD FAILURE
Pavement Types
I- Flexible Pavements (asphalt)
II- Rigid Pavement (Portland Cement).

Rigid Pavement
 Structure
 Surface course
 Base course
 Subbase course
 Subgrade
Flexible Pavement – Construction
Types of Flexible Pavement
Dense-graded
Open-graded Gap-graded
Pavement Performance
Smooth 
Durable 
Low maintenance 
Pavement Condition
Pavement Condition
Rigid Pavement – Construction
Fixed form
Types of Rigid Pavement
Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (JPCP) 
Pavement Condition
Typical designed pavement structure
Hot-Mix Asphalt Surface
Base Course (Minimum CBR=80)

(May Require Stabilization)
Subbase (Minimum CBR=20)

(May Require Stabilization)
Frost Protection (As Appropriate)
Subgrade
 high quality of surface layer
 Crushed materials used for the base and
subbase
 The high levels of compaction achieved.
 Available of material
The pavement structure consists of the following layers:
 Asphalt surface layer

 Granular layer
 Sub-Grade
Sampling
Sampling
- Sampling from Roadway (Bases & Subbases)
- Sampling Stockpiles
- Belt sampling
- Tube Sampling
- Quartering or Splitting Samples
- Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
Roadway Sampling
‐Two random samples shall be obtained from different areas
of the lot and Tested separately.
‐The samples shall be a minimum of 30 kg. each.
‐ The sample shall be Taken for the full depth of the layer
being sampled using a steel sampling ring approved by
The Department. No sample shall be taken from within
(0.6 m) of the edge Of The spread of material.
Production Stockpile Sampling
- Obtain the sample from an area that represents material.
-The material should be approximately one loader bucket load.
-The loading unit shall dump the material on the ground .
-Strike off and level to approximately half the original pile height.
-The flat surface shall be divided into four sections.
- Identify sampling areas as A, B, C, and D, as shown below.Opposite quadrants
such as A and D, shall be used To acquire the sample
Material first dumped Material after being

on Ground Leveled off and sectioned
Belt Sampling
‐Two random samples shall be obtained from different
portions of the lot and tested separately .
‐The samples shall be taken from the conveyor belt before the
Material has passed through the pug mill.
‐The sample is obtained by isolating a cross section of the
belt and removing all material inside of the isolated cross
section.
Tube Sampling
‐Fine aggregate samples may be obtained from the stockpile
using a tube approved by the Department. The tube shall
be a minimum of 1 ¼ ” ( 30mm) in diameter by 6 Feet (
2m) in length.
‐The tube shall be constructed of aluminum and shall have
square cut ends.
‐The sample is obtained by inserting the tube into the
stockpile
‐At evenly spaced locations across the load face of the pile. A
minimum of five insertions of the tube shall be made.
‐The insertions are to be made at a minimum height of three
feet from the bottom of the pile.
Aggregate Testing
Aggregate Testing
 Physical: Grading, Shape, Relative Density, Bulk Density,
Water Absorption
 Strength: Franklin Point Load
 Mechanical: Los Angeles Abrasion ,crushing test,impact
 Durability: Sulphate Soundness, Frost Heave, Slake Durability
Index.
 Chemical: Organic Matter, Chloride, Sulphate or full analysis
 Specialist: Petrography, Chemical Test, Mortar Bar and
Accelerated Mortar Bar and Concrete Prism Method
Aggregate and Materials Testing
 Basic Properties
 Gradation
 Moisture Content
 Bulk Specific Gravity
 Unit Weight
 Dry Rodded Density
 Absorption
 Organic Content
 Clay Lumps
 Material Finer than 75 m m by Washing
 Sand Equivalent
 Flat and Elongated Coarse Aggregate Particles
 Crushed Particles Count (one face and two face)
 Petrographic Examination of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
 Petrographic Number evaluation of Coarse Aggregates
 Durability
 Magnesium or Sodium Sulphate Soundness Testing on Fine or
Coarse Aggregate
 Los Angeles Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate
 Aggregate Crushing Value
 Slake Durability
 Expansion Testing
 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate
 Degredation Test
 Durability Index
 Sand Equivalent
 Alkali‐Aggregate Reaction:
 Accelerated Mortar Bar Test (ASTM C‐1260)
 Concrete Prism Expansivity Test (ASTM C‐1293
 Alkali‐Carbonate Reaction (by Chemical Analysis)
 Petrographic Examination of Hardened Concrete
(ASTM C‐856)
Aggregate Testing
The key engineering properties are generally:
 Gradation
 Soil Classification
 Compaction
 CBR Value
 Abrasion
 Clay lumps
 Flakiness and Elongation Index
Gradation Analysis - Sieve
Analysis (ASTM D 422)
Gradation Analysis - Sieve Analysis (ASTM D 422)
1- Apparatus and Equipments
2- Weigh out about 500g of sandy soil.
Note: The size of the sample depends on the maximum grain size. Check Table in ASTM standards
3- Determine the masses of the sieves.
4- Assemble sieves, with the sieves with the larger openings on top and a pan at
the bottom. Place the soil on top
5- Place lid on top. Tighten down on to sieving machine
6- Run sieving machine for 4 minutes. Inspect sieves, and visually
assess the masses retained in the sieves
7- Determine the masses of the sieves including the retained soil
8- Calculate percent passing for each sieve aperture, and draw plot on graph. Determine Cu and
Cc of the soil
FINENESS MODULUS
Atterberg Limits
(ASTM D 4318-00)
2- Obtain about 150g of soil passing #40 sieve
3- Mix soil-water thoroughly (make sure no crumbs are present)
4- Place a small amount of soil on L.L. device cup and make sure:
a. horizontal surface
b. b. deepest part about 8-10 mm (check with the groove tool)
c.
5- Cut a groove (2 mm at the base)
6- Reset the counter in the Liquid Limit device to read zero
7- Run the device which will lift and drop the cup from 1 cm height @ 120 rpm
8- When the two halves of the soil pat come in contact at the bottom of groove
along a distance of ½”, Record the "Count" of the no. of drops
9- Take a soil sample and find the moisture content and record it along with
the no. of drops
10- Re-mix the rest of the soil with more water (1 to 5 ml increment) or dry the mix if
it's too wet using a hair dryer and repeat the above steps (3 - 9) to get three blow counts
between:
i. 15-25
ii. 20-30
iii. 25-35
11- Plot the three moisture contents (y-axis) and the no. of drops (x-axis in log scale) find L.L. from plot.
(Note: LL is the moisture content at 25 drops)
12- Take 1.5 to 2 gm of sample from the soil prepared in step 3
13- Prepare several ellipsoidal-shaped soil masses
14- Roll one of the ellipsoidal-shaped soil masses to form 1/8” thread
15- Keep repeating until it breaks at 1/8” thread
16- Collect the small crumble pieces in two cans and find the moisture content. The average M.C.
is P.L.
Soil Classification Systems
 Soil Classification Systems
 USCS = Unified Soil Classification System
 AASHTO
Civil Engineering - Texas Tech

University
Civil Engineering - Texas Tech
University
For soils in AASHTO group A−3 or lower:
GI = (F−35) [0.2 + 0.005(LL−40)] + 0.01(F−15)(PI−10)
For soils in A−1 or A−2:
GI = 0.01(F−15)(PI−10)
In both formulas, F is the percent of the soil sample passing the #200 sieve.
Example 1: Classify the following soil by the AASHTO System.
Given: % passing No. 10 = 100; % passing No.40 = 80;
% passing No. 200 = 58; LL = 30; PI = 10.
Solution:
From Table 3.2, the group classification is A−4.
From the given data, F=58.
GI = (F−35) [0.2 + 0.005(LL−40)] + 0.01(F−15)(PI−1)
٣> −−٣٫٤٥ )٠)(٤٣(٠٫٠١)] + ١٠−(٠٫٠٠٥ + ٠٫٢)[٢٣= (
Thus, the AASHTO Classification is A−4 (3)
Aggregate Particle Shape
Crushing Concrete Slabs – Making Recycled
Aggregate
Recycled Aggregate – Crushed PC Concrete
Effects of Particle Shape and Surface Texture
of Aggregate on Concrete
• Rough textured and angular aggregates give better bond
between the aggregate and the cement paste and thus higher
strength for the same water cement ratio.
• However, rough and angular aggregates requires more water
to produce the same workability in a fresh concrete.
• The two effects offset one another. With satisfactory
gradation, both crushed and noncrushed aggregates (of the
same rock type) generally give about the same strength for
the same cement content.
• It is undesirable to have flaky & elongated particles.
Laser Profiler
LASS, UT Austin
Automated Quality Assessment
A g g reg ates Laser p ro filing Im ag e creatio n
Q uality rep o rt C lassificatio n W avelet A nalysis

Background (Cont’d)
3D Image
of Particles
(20 ~35 mm)
3D Image Segmentation (Cont’d)
Canny Edges Original
Segmented
With Liberal Particle
Image
Threshold Values Picture
Main Features
‐ Volume Calculation
 Flat and Elongated Ratio
 Particle Size Distribution (Gradation)
 Angularity
 Surface Texture
 Surface Area
University of Illinois Aggregate
• Conveyor speed of 3 in./second
Image Analyzer ‐ UIAIA • Particles placed 10 in. apart
• Images captured within
0.1 second in succession
Progressive Scan
Video Camera
Fiber Optic Motion Sensor

Surface Area (SA) Computation
Z
(a, b, c)
(0, b, c)  dV   dxdydz

Particle
c Domain
(a, 0,
c)
O b Y  dA   dxdydz
 Particle
Surface
(a, b, 0)
pixel
X
Summation of the 2-D ∆Si’ contained in voxels forming the particle surface gives
the surface area of the particle in units of voxels (pixel cuboids)
3D Particle Descriptors
Angularity Index 
Round vs. Angular
Angularity3D Particle
Index Descriptors
4500
450
4000
3500
3000
2500
200
2000
1500
1000
500
0 0
Round Angular
3D Particle Descriptors
• Texture Index
Smooth vs. Rough
3D
Texture Index Particle Descriptors
5000
500
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
200
2000
1500
1000
500
0 0
Smooth Rough
Soil Compaction Testing
• Compaction, or density testing can be a tricky

thing
• Compaction - Densification of soil by
removing air voids using mechanical
equipment
• As compaction increases, the following occurs:
Strength increases
Potential for settlement decreases
Standard Proctor Modified Proctor

•1/30 ft3 mold •1/30 ft3 mold
•5.5 lb hammer •10 lb hammer
•12” drop •18” drop
•3 layers of soil •5 layers of soil
•25 blows / layer •25 blows / layer
• In soils, compaction is a function of water content
Moisture Density Test Results
112.0
111.0
110.0
109.0
108.0
107.0
Dry Density (pcf)
106.0
105.0
104.0
103.0
102.0
101.0
100.0
8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00
Moisture Content (%)
Calculated Curve Points

2- Obtain about 10 lb ( 4.5 kg) of air-dry soil on which the compaction test is to
be conducted. Break all the soil lumps and Sieve the soil on a No.4 U.S. sieve.
3- Collect all of the minus-4 material in a large pan. This should be about 6 lb
(2.7 kg) or more
4- Obtain a sample and find the moisture content
5- Add enough water (see table 1) to the minus-4 material and mix it in
thoroughly to bring the moisture content up to about 5% or check the following
Group 1: 5% , 7% & 9%
Group 2: 8%, 10% & 12%
Group 3: 11%, 13% & 15%
Group 4: 14%, 16% & 18%
6- Determine the weight of the Proctor mold + base plate (not the
extension), W1, (lb)
7- Attach the extension to the top of the mold.
8- Pour the moist soil into the mold in three equal layers. Each laye.
9- Each layer should be compacted uniformly by the standard Proctor hammer
25 times before the next layer of loose soil is poured into the mold
“The layers of loose soil that are being poured into the mold should be such that,
at the end of the three-layer compaction, the soil should extend slightly above the
top of the rim of the compaction mold
“10- Remove the top attachment from the mold. Be careful not to break off any
of the compacted soil inside the mold while removing the top attachment
11- Using a straight edge, trim the excess soil above the mold. Now the top of the
compacted soil will be even with the top of the mold
12- Determine the weight of the mold + base plate + compacted moist soil in the
mold, W2 (lb
13- Remove the base plate from the mold. Using a jack, extrude the compacted
soil cylinder from the mold.
14- From the moist soil extruded in Step 13, collect a moisture sample in the
moisture can and determine the moisture content of the moist soil.
15- Break the rest of the compacted soil (to No.4 size) by hand and mix it with the
left- over moist soil in the pan. Add more water and mix it to raise the moisture
content by about 2%
16- Repeat Steps 5 - 15, share your results with the other groups
17- calculate the dry unit weight of the soil and plot it against the moisture content, then find the
optimum moisture content and the maximum dry unit weight
Measurement of Field Compaction
 Most common methods
are
 Nuclear Method
 Sand Cone method
 Rubber Balloon method
Nuclear Method
• The testing is determined in the field, typically
using a nuclear density gauge
Sand Cone Method:
Test Equipments
Step 1- . Weight of Proctor mold, W1
.
Step 2a- Pouring the sand into the compaction mold
.
Step2b- Making the surface leveled
.
Step2c- Compaction mold filled out with sand
.
Step 2d-Weight of proctor mold + Sand, W2
.
Step 5. Weight of plastic Gallon+Cone+Sand (before use).
Step 6a-Close the valve of the cone attached to the cone
Step 6b- turn the cone and gallon upside down
.
Step 6c- open the valve, sand flows from the gallon to the cone, after the flow
stops close the valve and take the gallon+cone from the tray
Step 6d- CNTD...
Step 6e- Weight of plastic Gallon+Cone+Sand (after use
Step 8a- Weight of plastic Gallon+Cone+Sand (before use)
Step 8b- Go to the field where the soil's unit weight is to be measured and
place the metal tray and fasten the 4 screws.
Step 8c- Dig up a hole about 10 to 15 cm deep.
Step 8d- As you are digging the hole put the retrieved soil into the plastic bag
in order that the soil does not lose moisture.
Step 8e- All of the soil is transferred into the bag
Step 8f- The soft soil at the bottom of the hole is poured into the bag as well.
Step 8g- All of the soil is transferred into the bag
step 8h-Having the valve closed turn the gallon+cone upside down and place
the cone in the center hole of tray and open the valve so that sand flows
Step 8i- sand flows CNTD... Unlike this photo plastic bag should be kept
closed
Step 8j- After flow of sand stops close the valve and pick the assembly up,
the sand in the cone will be poured into the tray.
Step 8k- CNTD
.
Step 8L- The sand in the hole and the overflow sand will be left in the field,
grab all parts and get back to the lab.
Step 9- Weight of plastic Gallon+Cone+Sand (after use)
.
Step 11- Weigh the evaporating dish
.
step 12- Weigh the evaporating dish + wet soil from the field
.
Step 13- Put the evaporating dish + wet soil in the oven and after 24hrs
weigh it again
.
80
40
• This test method is fairly reliable, however the
operator must be experienced and know what they are
doing
• In addition, just because you pass a compaction test
does not mean you have good material
• If it passes compaction, it does not mean it is good
• GE must determine 1st if the soil is acceptable as fill,
then the compaction must pass
Asphalt Drum Plant
Woodrow Wilson Bridge Project
Concrete Testing
Common Tests
Slump Air Content Compressive Strength
‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‪ /‬اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﻓﺮع هﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ )‪(Highway Construction Stages‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱰﺍﺑﻴﺔ )‪(Earthworks‬‬
‫أوﻻ‪ :‬إﺧﻼء اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬
‫إن أول ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ إﻧ ﺸﺎء اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ه ﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗ ﻊ وإﻋ ﺪادﻩ ﻟﻔ ﺮش ﻃﺒﻘ ﺎت اﻟﺘﺒﻠ ﻴﻂ‪ .‬وﺗﺨﺘﻠ ﻒ ﺗﻜ ﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف اﻷﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﺈن اﻗﺘﺼﺮت ﻋﻠﻰ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺸﺎﺋﺶ واﻷﺷﺠﺎر ﺣﺴﺒﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺿ ﻤﻦ ﻓﻘ ﺮة اﻟﺤﻔ ﺮ‬
‫وإن ﺗﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﻮدا أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ إدراج آﻠﻔﺔ إﺧﻼء اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻓﻘﺮة ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أوﻻ‪ 1-‬اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ إزاﻟﺔ اﻷﺷﺠﺎر وﺟﺬورهﺎ واﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻧﻘﺎض اﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮدة ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗ ﻊ‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ ذﻟ ﻚ ﻋ ﻦ ﻃﺮﻳ ﻖ إزاﻟ ﺔ اﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗ ﺎت ﻣ ﻦ ﻣ ﻮاد اﻟ ﺮدم اﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮدة ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﻣﻨﻌ ﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻠﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﻊ اﻟ ﺰﻣﻦ ﻣ ﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺗ ﺮك‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻏﺎت وﺣﺪوث هﺒﻮط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫أوﻻ‪ 2-‬اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺤﻀﺮﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺤﻀﺮﻳﺔ اﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﺟﻮهﺮﻳ ﺎ ﻋﻨﻬ ﺎ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﻨ ﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴ ﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪد اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻵهﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻜﺎن أو ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺬر إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻻﺧ ﻼء وﺗﺤ ﺪد اﻟﻤﻨ ﺸﺂت اﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻌﻄ ﻰ ﻟﻬ ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻳﺠ ﺐ إزاﻟ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺒ ﺎﻧﻲ وﻏﻴﺮه ﺎ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻌﻘﺒ ﺎت اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠ ﺔ وﻳﺠ ﺐ إﻋ ﺎدة إﻧ ﺸﺎء أو ﻧﻘ ﻞ اﻟﺨ ﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ أﺳﻼك اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﺧﻄﻮط ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎذي أو ﺗﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻋ ﺪم إﻋﺎﻗﺘﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺪم ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻘﻮل ﺑﺄن ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ إﺧ ﻼء اﻟﻤﻮﻗ ﻊ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﻨ ﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺤ ﻀﺮﻳﺔ أﺻ ﻌﺐ ﻣﻨﻬ ﺎ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﻨ ﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑ ﺴﺒﺐ وﺟ ﻮد ﺷ ﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻤﻴ ﺎﻩ واﻟﻤﺠ ﺎري اﻟ ﺼﺤﻴﺔ وﺧﻄ ﻮط ﻧﻘ ﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗ ﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ وآﻴ ﺒﻼت اﻟﻬ ﺎﺗﻒ وﻏﻴﺮه ﺎ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺸﻂ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮي اﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎت واﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗ ﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺣﺘ ﻰ اﻟﻮﺻ ﻮل إﻟ ﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺷﻄﺔ وﺳﻤﻚ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻢ‪..‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 1-‬اﻟﺤﻔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫وهﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ أو اﻟﺼﺨﻮر وﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ )ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎت ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﺒﺎر ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ آﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ‪ subgrade‬وﻓ ﻲ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ ﺻ ﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺘ ﺮك‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪأ أﻋﻤﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ أﻣﺎ إذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺤ ﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ أو اﺳ ﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣ ﻮردة أو ﻣ ﺴﺘﻌﺎرة‬
‫)‪ (borrow soil‬إﻟ ﻰ اﻷﻣ ﺎآﻦ اﻟﻤﻄﻠ ﻮب ردﻣﻬ ﺎ )إذا آﺎﻧ ﺖ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠ ﺪﻓﻦ( أو إﻟ ﻰ اﻷﻣ ﺎآﻦ اﻟﻤﺨﺼ ﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺰاﺋﺪة )‪ .(waste soil‬وﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻌﺪات اﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاد ﻋﺎدة إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮاد ﺻﺨﺮﻳﺔ وﻣﻮاد ﺻﺨﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﻜﻜ ﺔ وﻣ ﻮاد ﻋﺎدﻳ ﺔ وﻳﻘ ﺼﺪ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻌﺎدﻳ ﺔ أي ﻧ ﻮع‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟ ﺼﺨﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬أﻣ ﺎ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟ ﺼﺨﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻜﻜ ﺔ ﻓﻴﻘ ﺼﺪ ﺑﻬ ﺎ اﻟ ﺼﺨﻮر اﻟﻤﺘﺂآﻠ ﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠ ﺔ ﻋﻮاﻣ ﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺔ أو ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ أو ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﻠﻴﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ واﻟﺼﺨﻮر‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 1-1-‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺮه ﺎ ﻟﻤ ﺴﺎﻓﺔ أآﺒ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘ ﻞ اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴ ﺔ وﺗ ﺴﻤﻰ‬
‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس دﻳﻨﺎر‪)/‬م‪*3‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ( وهﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺠ ﻢ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻗﺪرﻩ م‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﻄ ﺔ واﺣ ﺪة ﻃﻮﻟﻬ ﺎ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ‪ .‬اﻟﻤ ﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻏﻴ ﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴ ﺔ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﻨﻘ ﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬ ﺎ ﻧ ﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫اﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﺳﻮاء ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺮدم أو ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺈذا اﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ أن ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺼﻮص ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻘﺪ اﻟﻤﻘﺎوﻟﺔ هﻲ ‪ 500‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻷي ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﻗ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ذﻟ ﻚ ﺿ ﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ‪ ،‬وإذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ هﻲ ‪ 800‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب آﻠﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺘﺮاب ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 2-‬أﻋﻤﺎل دﻓﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮق‪:‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 1-2-‬اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻦ‪ :‬وﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺘ ﺮب اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺤ ﺪل ﺑﻤﻮﺟ ﺐ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻ ﻔﺎت ﻟﺘﻜ ﻮّن إﻣ ﻼءات‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ وﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻴﻮل ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 2-2-‬اﻟﻤﻮاد ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻦ‪:‬‬
‫أ( ﺗﺮﺑﺔ اﻷهﻮار واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﻘﻌﺎت واﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺤﺎوﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %12‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ وزﻧًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ب( اﻷﻏﺼﺎن واﻟﺠﺬور وﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ت( اﻟﻤﻮاد ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ اﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ث( اﻷﻧﺴﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻔﺤﻤﺔ واﻷﺧﺸﺎب‪.‬‬
‫ج( اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺠﺒﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺎوﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %10‬وزﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﻼح اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺬوﺑﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ح( اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ‪ %70‬أو‪ /‬و ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻠﺪوﻧﺔ ‪.%45‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :3-‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ أو أﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺪﻓﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪﻓﻦ وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻋﻤ ﻞ اﺧﺘﺒ ﺎر )ﺑﺮوآﺘ ﺮ اﻟﻤﻌ ﺪل‪ ،‬واﻟ ﺬي‬
‫ﺳ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿ ﻴﺤﻪ ﻻﺣﻘ ًﺎ( ﻹﻳﺠ ﺎد أﻗ ﺼﻰ آﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ ﺟﺎﻓ ﺔ )‪ (maximum dry density‬وﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠ ﻰ‬
‫)‪ (optimum water content‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺣﺪل أو رص اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت أو وﺳ ﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﻟ ﺮص اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ وزﻳ ﺎدة آﺜﺎﻓﺘﻬ ﺎ ﻋ ﻦ ﻃﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻃ ﺮد اﻟﻬ ﻮاء ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻔﺮاﻏ ﺎت‬
‫وإﻋﺎدة ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ أو ﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺰداد ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟ ﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻨﻬ ﺎ وﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺑﻌ ﻀﻬﺎ اﻟ ﺒﻌﺾ وﻳﻌﻤ ﻞ اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻧﺰﻻق اﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﺎداﻣﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ أﻗﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻘ ﺼﻮى آﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬآﺮ أن ﻃﺮد اﻟﻬ ﻮاء ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻤ ﺴﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﻜ ﻮن أﺳ ﻬﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﺑ ﺎﻗﻲ أﻧ ﻮاع اﻟﺘ ﺮب اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺪا آﺒﻴﺮا وﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺣﺪل اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺮد اﻟﻬﻮاء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺮاﻏﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳ ﺘﻢ إﺟ ﺮاء اﺧﺘﺒ ﺎرات اﻟﺘﺤﻘ ﻖ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﺴﺐ اﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺠﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺨ ﺮوط اﻟﺮﻣﻠ ﻲ‬
‫)‪.(sand cone‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺤﺪل اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺣﺎدﻻت أﺿﻼف اﻟﻐ ﻨﻢ )‪ :(Sheep's foot rollers‬وه ﻲ ﻋﺒ ﺎرة ﻋ ﻦ اﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴ ﺔ ﻣﺠﻮﻓ ﺔ ﻣﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬ ﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺤ ﻮاﻓﺮ وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ زﻳ ﺎدة اﻟ ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﺑﻤﻠ ﺊ اﻻﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤ ﺎء أو ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ أو أي ﺳ ﺎﺋﻞ ﺛﻘﻴ ﻞ وﺗ ﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪل ﺑﺄن ﺗﺨﺘﺮق اﻷﺿﻼف اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ وﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﻤﺮار ﻣ ﺮور اﻟﺤﺎدﻟ ﺔ ﻓ ﻮق اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳ ﺔ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﺪرﺟ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺎد اﻷﺿﻼف ﺗﺨﺘﺮق اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻟﺘ ﺮب اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴ ﺔ واﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ واﻟﻄ ﻴﻦ وﻳﺘ ﺮاوح وزﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ‪ 10000-6000‬رﻃ ﻞ ﺑﻌ ﺮض ‪ 8‬ﻗ ﺪم ﻟﻠﻮﺣ ﺪات اﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔ ﺔ و‬
‫‪ 75000‬رﻃﻞ ﺑﻌﺮض ‪ 15‬ﻗﺪم ﻟﻠﺤﺎدﻻت اﻟﻌﻤﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت ذات اﻹﻃﺎرات اﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ :(Pneumatic-tired rollers‬وﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ إﻃ ﺎرات ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻮزﻳﻊ اﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘ ﺴﺎوي ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻹﻃ ﺎرات وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ اﻟ ﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑ ﻮزن اﻟﺤﺎدﻟ ﺔ ﺑﻤﻠ ﺊ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء أو اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﺮﻃﺐ وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﻬﻮاء داﺧ ﻞ اﻹﻃ ﺎرات ﻟﺰﻳ ﺎدة اﻟ ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﻋﻠ ﻰ أﺳ ﺎس رص ﺣﺒﻴﺒ ﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﺑﻌ ﻀﻬﺎ اﻟ ﺒﻌﺾ وﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬ ﻲ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒ ﺎ ﻣ ﺎ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻣ ﺆﺛﺮة إذا ﻣ ﺎ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣ ﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻜﻜ ﺔ‪ .‬ه ﺬا وﻳﻜ ﻮن ﻋ ﺎدة وزن ه ﺬا اﻟﻨ ﻮع ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ أﻃﻨﺎن أو أآﺜﺮ وﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻹﻃ ﺎرات اﻟﻌ ﺎﻟﻲ ﻓ ﺈن‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت اﻟﻘﺪرة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪل آﻞ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺘﺮب وﻷﻋﻤﺎق آﺒﻴﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ -3‬اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت ذات اﻟﻌﺠﻼت اﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﺴﺎء )‪ :(Smooth-wheel rollers‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﻣ ﻦ ﻋﺠﻠﺘ ﻴﻦ أو‬
‫ﺛﻼث ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻠﺐ اﻷﻣﻠﺲ وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴ ﺔ واﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻰ واﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺤﺎوﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﺮ ﻣﻜﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻄﺎء ﺳ ﻄﺢ أﻣﻠ ﺲ ﺑﻌ ﺪ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت اﻟﻤﺴﻨﻨﺔ )أﺿﻼف اﻟﻐﻨﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻌﺪات اﻟﺤﺪل اﻻهﺘﺰازﻳ ﺔ )‪ :(Vibrating rollers‬ﻗﺎﻣ ﺖ ﺑﻌ ﺾ اﻟ ﺸﺮآﺎت ﺑﺘﻄ ﻮﻳﺮ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ذات اﻹﻃ ﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ أو ذات اﻟﻌﺠﻼت اﻟﻤﻠﺴﺎء اﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺰوﻳﺪهﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ إﺣﺪاث ﺣﺮآﺔ اهﺘﺰازﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺠﻼت أو‬
‫ﺑﺘﺰوﻳﺪهﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﻌﺪات اﻟﻬﺰازة وﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﺪات ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺪاﻓﻌ ﺔ أو ﻣﺮآﺒ ﺔ آﺠ ﺰء ﻣ ﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ أﻇﻬﺮت هﺬﻩ اﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮا آﺒﻴﺮا ﻓﻲ ﺣ ﺪل اﻷﺣﺠ ﺎر ورص ﻃﺒﻘ ﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫أو ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺤﺎوﻳﺔ أو اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻰ وﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻂ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮهﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ اﻷرض اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﺒﻠﻴﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺠﻮﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(water table‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤ ﻞ آﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮرﻧﻴ ﺎ )‪ :(California Bearing Ratio C.B.R.‬ﺣ ﺪدت اﻟﻤﻮاﺻ ﻔﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻄ ﺮق‬
‫واﻟﺠﺴﻮر اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ آﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮرﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮب اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻔﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﺒﻠ ﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬ ﺎ ﺑ ـ )‪ (%4‬ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪل ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ )‪ (%95‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ أﻣﺎ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ آﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺨﻄ ﻮات‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫أ( ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠ ﺔ وﺗﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺴﻤﻨﺖ وذﻟ ﻚ ﺑﺨﻠ ﻂ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺴﻤﻨﺖ ﻣ ﻊ إﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻘﻠﻴ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﺎء وذﻟ ﻚ ﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴ ﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ب( اﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة وﺟﻠﺐ ﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ج( اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻰ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ )اﻟﺠﻠﻤﻮد( )وﻳﺴﻤﻰ اﻟﺤﺼﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﻤﻮد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﺮ اﻟﺤﺼﻰ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻢ(‪:‬‬
‫إذا آﺎن ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت آﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﺈن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ واﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺮى ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺠﻠﻤﻮد ﻣﻊ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺣﺘﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﻘﺮرة ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ ﺿ ﻤﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺪود‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻻ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺣ ﺪل ﻣ ﻮاد اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻴ ﺔ )‪ (embankment‬إ ّ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻘﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﻘ ﻞ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻟﻺﻣﻼﺋﻴ ﺎت اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻴ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮﻳ ﺎت اﻹﻧ ﺸﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫‪ %95‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤ ﻰ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻳ ﺘﻢ إﺟ ﺮاء ﻓﺤ ﺺ اﻟﺘﺤﻘ ﻖ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴ ﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺮوط اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻲ )‪ (sand cone‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﺿﺢ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة واﻷآﺘﺎف اﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ‪30‬ﺳ ﻢ ﻋ ﻦ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﻬ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫‪ %95‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤ ﻰ‪ ،‬وﺗﻌﺘﺒ ﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻜ ﻮن آﺜﺎﻓﺘﻬ ﺎ اﻟﻘ ﺼﻮى اﻟﺠﺎﻓ ﺔ أﻗ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫‪ 1.7‬ﻏﻢ‪/‬ﺳﻢ‪ 3‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﻚ ‪ 30‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ وﻳﺠﺐ اﺳ ﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺤﺪل اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻤﻴﻮل واﻷآﺘ ﺎف ذات اﻟﻤﻨ ﺴﻮب دون ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺳ ﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪل ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ %93‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺤﺪل اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻮل واﻷآﺘﺎف ذات اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ إﻟ ﻰ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺣ ﺪل ﻻ ﺗﻘ ﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ‪ %94‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ‪ 20-15‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ درﺟ ﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻷﻗ ﻞ ﻧﻤ ﻮذﺟﻴﻦ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ‪ 2000‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻣﺮﺑ ﻊ أو‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﻤﺸﺮف‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻓ ﺮش ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ أﺧ ﺮى ﻗﺒ ﻞ اﻟﺘﺄآ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻬ ﺎ ﻗ ﺪ ﺣ ﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ وﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﻤﺎن ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎح ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ )‪ %12+‬إﻟﻰ ‪.(%4-‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ رﻓﻊ اﻷﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ وذﻟﻚ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﱰﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ )‪(Modified Proctor‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻳﺠﺎد اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮى اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ووزن وﺣﺪة اﻟﺤﺠﻮم ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟ ﺔ )اﻟﻤﻜﺒﻮﺳ ﺔ( ﻓ ﻲ ﻗﺎﻟ ﺐ ذي‬
‫أﺑﻌﺎد ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ وﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ زﻧﺔ ‪ 4.5‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ وزﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ارﺗﻔﺎع )‪ 457‬ﻣﻠﻢ( )‪18‬إﻧﺞ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ وذﻟ ﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠ ﻰ )‪ (Optimum Water Content‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ وأﻗ ﺼﻰ آﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ ﺟﺎﻓ ﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Maximum Dry Density‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﻣﺮاﺣﻞ إﺟﺮاء هﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ آﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد إﻳﺠﺎد أﻗﺼﻰ آﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ وﺗﺠﻔﻒ إﻣﺎ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء أو‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ‪ 60‬درﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ أن ﺗ ﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺘ ﺖ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺘﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪ 4‬وﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮزة ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﻐﺮﺑﻠﺔ آﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺰن ‪ 2.5‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎء إﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮذة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑ ﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴ ﺪ إﻟ ﻰ أن ﺗﻈﻬ ﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧ ﺴﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴ ﺔ ﻣﺤﺘ ﻮى اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺪل أو آ ﺒﺲ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻴﻨ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﻗﺎﻟ ﺐ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻧﻲ إﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﻲ ﺑﻘﻄ ﺮ داﺧﻠ ﻲ ﻳﺒﻠ ﻎ ‪ 101.6‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ وارﺗﻔ ﺎع ‪ 116.4‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ‬
‫وﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 944‬ﺳﻢ‪ 3‬وﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ وﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ)آﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟ ﺼﻮرة أدﻧ ﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت وزن آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 0.5‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗ ﺴﻘﻂ ﺑ ﺸﻜﻞ ﺣ ﺮ ﺑﺘ ﺄﺛﻴﺮ وزﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﻦ إرﺗﻔ ﺎع‬
‫)‪457‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ( أو )‪ 18‬إﻧ ﺞ( ﻋ ﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻟ ﺐ وﺑﻮاﻗ ﻊ ‪ 25‬ﺿ ﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣﻮزﻋ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘ ﺴﺎوي ﻋﻠ ﻰ آ ﻞ أﺟ ﺰاء اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻣﻊ اﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻄﺮق‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ وﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﻮى اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻴ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟ ﺐ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻣﺴﻄﺮة ﺣﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻳﺘﻢ وزن اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ وﺑﻪ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳ ﺘﻢ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺮاج اﻟﻌﻴﻨ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻟ ﺐ وﺗﺆﺧ ﺬ ﺷ ﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻮدﻳ ﺔ ﻣ ﺎرة ﺑﻤﺮآﺰه ﺎ وﺗﺆﺧ ﺬ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ وزﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻏﺮام وﺗﻮزن ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺠﻔﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺮن وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﺨﻄﻮات أﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت اﻷرﺑﻊ اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ زﻳﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ آﻞ ﻣﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب ورﺳﻢ اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ آﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬وزن اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ وهﻮ ﻓﺎرغ = ‪ 3095‬ﻏﺮام )ﻣﻌﺮوف(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬وزن اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ = وزن اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ – ‪.3095‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺪاﺧﻞ = ‪ 944‬ﺳﻢ‪) 3‬ﻣﻌﺮوف(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ = )وزن اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ (944 /‬ﻏﻢ‪/‬ﺳﻢ‪.3‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ = }اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ‪)/‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.100 * { (100+%‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺣﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﱰﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻲ )‪(Sand Cone‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮد ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻔﺤﺺ هﻮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ آﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓ ﻲ ﻃﺮﻳ ﻖ أو ﺟ ﺴﺮ أو ﺗﻌﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺗﺮاﺑﻴ ﺔ وﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺘ ﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺔ اﻟﺠﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤ ﻰ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗ ﻢ ﺣ ﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺎ ﻓ ﻲ ﻇ ﺮوف ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻟ ﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬ ﺎز‬
‫ﺑﺮوآﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻌﺪل‪.‬‬
‫وﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻔﺤﺺ هﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺮاد إﺟﺮاء ﻓﺤﺺ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻓﻴ ﻪ )آﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟ ﺼﻮرة أدﻧ ﺎﻩ( ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ اﻟﻘﺎﻋ ﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷرآﺎن اﻷرﺑﻌ ﺔ ﻟﻬ ﺎ ﺑ ﺎﻟﺒﺮاﻏﻲ ﺛ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺮاج اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ داﺧ ﻞ اﻟ ﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺷ ﻜﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 15-10‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ وزن هﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ وﺗﺤﺪد ﻧﺴﺒﺔ رﻃﻮﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮن آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﻢ وزن ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻤﺨﺮوط اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻲ اﻟﺤﺎوي ﻋﻠﻰ رﻣﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﺮوف اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ رأس اﻟﻤﺨﺮوط ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮهﺔ اﻟﺤﻔﺮة ﻓﻮق اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟ ﺼﻤﺎم اﻟﺨ ﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬ ﺎز آ ﻲ ﻳﻨ ﺰل اﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳ ﻲ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﺤﻔ ﺮة إﻟ ﻰ أن ﺗﻤﺘﻠ ﺊ اﻟﺤﻔ ﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ وآ ﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻟﻘﻤﻊ وﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﺰول اﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻤﺎم اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺮﻓﻖ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺣﺴﺎب اﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫)أ( وزن اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻸ اﻟﻘﻤﻊ )ﻣﻌﺮوف ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫)ب( آﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻣﻌﺮوﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫)ج( أﻗﺼﻰ آﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﺔ )ﻣﻌﺮوﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﺧﺘﺒﺎر ﺑﺮوآﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻌﺪل آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎت‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬وزن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ +‬اﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﺤﺺ = ‪ ..........‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬وزن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ +‬اﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﺤﺺ = ‪ ..........‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬وزن اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻣﻸ اﻟﻘﻤﻊ ‪ +‬وزن اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻣﻸ اﻟﺤﻔﺮة = )‪ (2) – (1‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬وزن اﻟﺮﻣﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻣﻸ اﻟﺤﻔﺮة ﻓﻘﻂ = )‪) – (3‬أ( آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺤﻔﺮة = )‪) / (4‬ب(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬وزن اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻔﺮة = ‪ ..........‬آﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮام‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﺔ = )‪.(5) / (6‬‬
‫)‪ (8‬اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ = })‪)/ (7‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.100 * { (100+%‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل )‪) / (8) } = (%‬ج( { * ‪.100‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )‪(Sub-base‬‬

‫‪ -1‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ وﺗﺪرج ﻣﻮاد اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﻂ اﻟﺮﻣﻞ )اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ( واﻟﺤﺼﻰ )اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﺨﺸﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﺨ ﺸﻦ ه ﻮ اﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘ ﻲ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺨ ﻞ ذي اﻟﻤﻘ ﺎس )‪ 2‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ( )ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ ‪ .(10‬وﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺮآﺎم ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت ﺻﻠﺒﺔ وذات دﻳﻤﻮﻣ ﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ وﺧﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟ ﺸﻮاﺋﺐ وﻻ ﺗﺰﻳ ﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻔﺎﺷﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺂآﻞ )‪ (Wearing test‬ﻋﻦ ‪.%45‬‬
‫أﻣ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﻨ ﺎﻋﻢ )اﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ( ﻓﻬ ﻮ اﻟﻤ ﺎر ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ )‪2‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ( )ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ ‪ (10‬وﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻳﻜ ﻮن ذا‬
‫ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت ﺣﺎدة اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺎت أو ﺧﻠﻴﻂ ﻣﺘﺪرج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻣﻞ واﻟﻐﺮﻳﻦ واﻟﻄﻴﻦ وﻏﺒﺎر اﻟﺤﺠﺮ )أو أي ﻣﺎدة راﺑﻄ ﺔ(‪ .‬وﻳﺠ ﺐ أن‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺮآﺎم ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻮاﺋﺐ أو اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ وﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻷﻣﻼح اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺬوﺑﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﺮآﻴﺒ ﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ‪ .%10‬أﻣ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒ ﺎت اﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﻨ ﺎﻋﻢ اﻟﻌ ﺎﺑﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ )‪0.425‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ( )ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ ‪ (40‬ﻓﻴﺠ ﺐ أن ﻳﺤﻘ ﻖ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻵﺗﻴﺔ آﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺪ اﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ )‪ (liquid limit‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز ‪.%25‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻠﺪوﻧﺔ )‪ (plasticity index‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز ‪.%6‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺪرﺟﺎت اﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﻷرﺑﻌ ﺔ أﻧ ﻮاع ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺘ ﺪرﺟﺎت )‪(D,C,B,A‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻨﻮع ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻷآﺘﺎف أو ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Selected Granular Material-Grade Requirements‬‬

‫‪Sieve Size‬‬ ‫‪Percent Passing by Weight‬‬
‫‪mm‬‬ ‫‪Alternative‬‬ ‫‪Type A‬‬ ‫‪Type B‬‬ ‫‪Type C‬‬ ‫‪Type D‬‬
‫‪75.00‬‬ ‫‪3 in.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪50.00‬‬ ‫‪2 in.‬‬ ‫‪95-100‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪25.00‬‬ ‫‪1 in.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪75-95‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫‪9.50‬‬ ‫‪3/8 in.‬‬ ‫‪30-65‬‬ ‫‪40-75‬‬ ‫‪50-85‬‬ ‫‪60-100‬‬
‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪No.4‬‬ ‫‪25-55‬‬ ‫‪30-60‬‬ ‫‪35-65‬‬ ‫‪50-85‬‬
‫‪2.36‬‬ ‫‪No.8‬‬ ‫‪16-42‬‬ ‫‪21-47‬‬ ‫‪26-52‬‬ ‫‪42-72‬‬
‫‪0.30‬‬ ‫‪No.50‬‬ ‫‪7-18‬‬ ‫‪14-28‬‬ ‫‪14-28‬‬ ‫‪23-42‬‬
‫‪0.075‬‬ ‫‪No.200‬‬ ‫‪2-8‬‬ ‫‪5-15‬‬ ‫‪5-15‬‬ ‫‪5-20‬‬
‫ﺗ ﺬآﺮ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻ ﻔﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻄ ﺮق واﻟﺠ ﺴﻮر ﺑﺄﻧ ﻪ ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﺨ ﺮج ﺗ ﺪرج ﻣ ﻮاد اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺪ اﻷدﻧ ﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻘ ﺎس ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧ ﻞ ﻳﺘﺒﻌ ﻪ ﺧ ﺮوج ﻋ ﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺪ اﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻟﻤﻘ ﺎس ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ ﻣﺠ ﺎور ﻟ ﻪ أو ﺑ ﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺳ ﻴﻌﺪ ذﻟ ﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺮوج ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪود اﻟﺘﺪرج وﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻮاد ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺗﺪرﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺬآﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﺄن ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ آﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮرﻧﻴﺎ )‪ (CBR‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ %45‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠ ﺼﻨﻒ‬
‫‪ A‬وﻋﻦ ‪ %35‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﻒ ‪ B‬وﻋﻦ ‪ %30‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﻒ ‪ C‬وﻋﻦ ‪ %20‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﻒ ‪ D‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺣ ﺪل‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ %95‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺤﺪدات اﻟﻄﻘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ أن ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻞ درﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮارة اﻟﺠ ﻮ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ 3‬درﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ وإن أي‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ أﺟﺰاء هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﺴﺒﺐ درﺟﺎت اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻮاﻃﺌﺔ )اﻻﻧﺠﻤﺎدﻳﺔ( ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻘ ﺸﻂ‬
‫وﻳﻌﺎد إﻧﺸﺎؤﻩ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺪون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي آﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎول‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪاﻳ ﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴ ﺬ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﺳ ﻴﺲ )‪ (Subgrade‬ﻧﻈﻴﻔ ﺔ وﺧﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ واﻷﻃﻴﺎن وﻣﺤﺪوﻟ ﺔ ﺑ ﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴ ﺪ وﺳ ﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﻣ ﺴﺘﻮ آﻤ ﺎ ه ﻮ ﻣﻄﻠ ﻮب ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﺘ ﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪ .‬وإن أي ﺟ ﺰء ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﺳ ﻴﺲ )‪ (Subgrade‬ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻣﺤ ﺪول ﺑ ﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴ ﺪ ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻳ ﺰال وﻳﻨﻔ ﺬ ﻣ ﻦ ﺟﺪﻳ ﺪ ﺣ ﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻ ﻔﺎت‪ ،‬وأي‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺤﻪ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎت ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺼﺤﺢ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس )‪:(Subbase Course‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺴﻤﻚ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﻋ ﻦ ‪20‬ﺳ ﻢ ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻳ ﺘﻢ إﻧ ﺸﺎؤهﺎ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺘ ﻴﻦ أو أآﺜ ﺮ‬
‫ذات ﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ٍو اﻋﺘﻤﺎدا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻴﺎت اﻟﺤﺪل اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺮﻃﻴﺐ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺤﺪل‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ اﻟﺮآﺎم ﻣ ﻊ اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺣﺘ ﻰ اﻟﺤ ﺼﻮل ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺤﺘ ﻮى رﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ ﻣﺘﺠ ﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻜ ﻞ أﺟ ﺰاء‬
‫اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد إﻧ ﺸﺎؤهﺎ وإن ﺣ ﺼﻮل ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ اﻻﻧﻌ ﺰال ﺑ ﺴﺒﺐ زﻳ ﺎدة اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺟ ﺰء ﻣ ﺎ ﻓﻴﺠ ﺐ أن ﻳ ﺆدي ذﻟ ﻚ إﻟ ﻰ‬
‫إزاﻟﺔ وإﻋﺎدة ﻓﺮش وﺗﺮﻃﻴﺐ رآﺎم ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺣﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣ ﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺣ ﺪل ﻻ ﺗﻘ ﻞ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ %95‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺔ اﻟﻌﻈﻤ ﻰ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ وﻳﻔﻀﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺣﺎل اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪ .‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬآﺮ أﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن‬
‫آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺎت ﻣ ﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﺔ أﺛﻨ ﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل وﺑﻌ ﺪهﺎ وأي ﺟ ﺰء ﻻ ﻳﺤ ﺼﻞ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪ .‬وﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟ ﺔ ﻟﻔﺤ ﺺ درﺟ ﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻷﻗ ﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤ ﻮذﺟﻴﻦ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ‪ 2000‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻣﺮﺑ ﻊ أو ﺣ ﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬ ﺎت اﻟﻤﻬﻨ ﺪس اﻟﻤ ﺸﺮف‪ ،‬وﻳﻔ ﻀﻞ أﺧ ﺬ ﻧﻘ ﺎط إﺿ ﺎﻓﻴﺔ وذﻟ ﻚ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ ﺑﺠﻮار أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ أو ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﻤﺠﺎري ﻷن هﺬﻩ اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺿﻌﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻤﻚ واﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜ ﻮن ﺳ ﻄﺢ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس )‪ (subbase‬ﻣ ﺴﺘ ٍﻮ وﻣﻨ ﺘﻈﻢ وﻋﻨ ﺪ ﻓﺤ ﺺ اﺳ ﺘﻮاﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﻄﺮة أﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮم ﺑﻄﻮل ‪ 4‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺮة وﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺳ ﻢ‪ .‬أﻣ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻋ ﻦ ‪1‬ﺳ ﻢ وﻻ ﻳﻘ ﻞ ﻋ ﻦ ‪2‬ﺳ ﻢ ﻋﻤ ﺎ ه ﻮ ﻣﻄﻠ ﻮب ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﺘ ﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪ .‬أﻣ ﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘ ﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻤﻚ اﻟﻜﻠ ﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺠ ﺎل اﻟﻤ ﺴﻤﻮح ﺑ ﻪ ه ﻮ اﺧ ﺘﻼف ﻓ ﻲ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻤﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫‪ %10‬وﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ .%15‬وإن أي ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄ ﺎﺑﻖ ﺳ ﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﻣ ﻊ ﻣ ﺎ ﻣﻄﻠ ﻮب ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄ ﺎت أو‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺪود اﻻﺧﺘﻼف اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ إزاﻟﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎد ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﺮض و ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻃ ﻮل‬
‫و ‪ 75‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺳﻤﻚ وﻳﺼﺎر إﻟﻰ إﻋﺎدة إﻧﺸﺎء ه ﺬا اﻟﺠ ﺰء وﻓﻘ ﺎ ﻟﻤ ﺎ ﻣﻄﻠ ﻮب ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﺘ ﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪ .‬وﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺠ ﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺬآﺮ ﺑﺄﻧ ﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮآﺒﺎت أو اﻵﻟﻴﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮور ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﺑﻌ ﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬ ﺎء ﻣ ﻦ إﻧ ﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ إذا آ ﺎن اﻟﻤﻮﺳ ﻢ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻢ‬
‫أﻣﻄﺎر‪ .‬وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺮاﻋﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻮار اﻟﻤﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ اﻷﻣﻄ ﺎر‪ .‬وﻗﺒ ﻞ‬
‫إﻋﻄﺎء اﻟﻤﻮاﻓﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ اﻟﺘﺄآ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴ ﺬ آﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻷﻋﻤ ﺎل ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻟﻄ ﺮق وﻋﻤ ﻞ اﻟﺘﺠ ﺎرب اﻟﻼزﻣ ﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺠﺎري ﻣﻴﺎﻩ اﻷﻣﻄﺎر واﻟﻤﺠﺎري اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ وﻋﺒﺎرات ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء واﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪ -8‬اﻟﺬرﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫إن وﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺎس ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ إﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ هﻮ اﻟﻤﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ وإن ﻋﺪد اﻷﻣﺘ ﺎر اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬرﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ هﻲ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت وأي ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟـ )‪ (subbase‬ﺗﻢ إﻧ ﺸﺎؤﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﺣﺪود ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻴﻪ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎت ﻓﻼ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬرﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﺠﺪر اﻹﺷﺎرة إﻟﻰ أﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟ ﺪ أﻧ ﻮاع أﺧ ﺮى ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد ﺗ ﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓ ﻲ إﻧ ﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﺎ ﺗﺤ ﺖ اﻷﺳ ﺎس ﻟ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻄ ﺮق إﻟﻴﻬ ﺎ ﺑ ﺴﺒﺐ ﻋ ﺪم ﺷ ﻴﻮع اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻌ ﺮاق ﻣﺜ ﻞ اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺴﻤﻨﺖ‬
‫)‪ (soil cement stabilized subbase‬أو اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﻄﻴﻨﻴ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘ ﺔ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻨﻮرة )‪ (lime stabilized subbase‬أو‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺑ ﺔ اﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻴ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺖ )‪ (bitumen stabilized subbase‬وﻣ ﻦ أراد اﻟﻤﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﻪ ﺑﻤﺮاﺟﻌ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ‪ R6E‬و ‪ R6F‬و ‪ R6G‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘ ﻮاﻟﻲ ﻟﻺﻃ ﻼع ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻ ﻴﻞ أآﺜ ﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮل هﺬا اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻒ )‪(Curbstone‬‬

‫ﺑﻌ ﺪ اﻟﻮﺻ ﻮل إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﻴﺐ اﻟﺨﺎﺻ ﺔ ﺑﺨﺮﺳ ﺎﻧﺔ أﺣﺠ ﺎر اﻟﺮﺻ ﻒ واﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻗ ﺪ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﺿ ﻤﻦ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﺳ ﻴﺲ‬
‫)‪ (Subgrade‬أو ﺿﻤﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس )‪ (Subbase‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ اﻟﻼزم ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴ ﺬ اﻷﺳ ﺎس اﻟﺨ ﺎص‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬
‫أﻋﻤﺎل ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺣﺠﺮ اﻟﺮﺻﻒ‪:‬‬
‫أ( اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤ ﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳ ﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴ ﺎر ﺛ ﻼث ﻧﻘ ﺎط ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺤ ﻮر اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻓ ﻲ أﻣ ﺎآﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗ ﺪﻗﻴﻖ اﺳ ﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ اﻋﺘﻤ ﺎدا ﻋﻠ ﻰ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘ ﺎط اﻟﺜﻼﺛ ﺔ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘ ﺎط ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﺳ ﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ واﺣ ﺪة وﻣﻮازﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮر اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻷﺣﺠﺎر آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠ ﻮب ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄ ﺎت ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬ ﺎز اﻟﻠﻴﻔ ﻞ أو‬
‫اﻟﺜﻮدوﻻﻳﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﻴﺔ رواﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ )‪ (Bench mark‬اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ب( اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ وﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ وزاوﻳﺘﻪ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻃﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻢ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ )هـ( إﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪد أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ وﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﺰء )هـ‪.(1‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻮﺿ ﻊ اﻟﺜﻴﻮدوﻻﻳ ﺖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄ ﺔ )س( وﻳ ﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴ ﻪ إﻟ ﻰ ﻧﻘﻄ ﺔ )ص( وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺿ ﺒﻂ اﻟﺰاوﻳ ﺔ اﻷﻓﻘﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﻴﻮدوﻻﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ اﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺮب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻷﻓﻘﻴ ﺔ )ه ـ‪ (1‬وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄ ﺔ‬
‫)ع‪ (1‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬ ﺎز اﻟﺜﻴﻮدوﻻﻳ ﺖ )وه ﻮ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ اﻟﺰاوﻳ ﺔ ه ـ‪ (1‬ﻣ ﻊ ﻃ ﻮل ﺟ ﺰء‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺴﺎوي )‪ (1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ )هـ‪ (1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧ ﺼﻞ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄ ﺔ )ع‪ (8‬وﻳﻜ ﻮن آﺎﻣ ﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨ ﻲ ﻗ ﺪ ﺗ ﻢ ﺗ ﺴﻘﻴﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷرض‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﺼﺐ ﺧﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻷﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ )‪ (Curbstone‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻋﺎدة ﺑﺴﻤﻚ )‪10‬ﺳﻢ( وﻋﺮض )‪30‬ﺳ ﻢ(‬
‫واﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺘﻴﺔ هﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﺧﻠﻂ )اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺖ اﻟﻤﻘ ﺎوم ﻟﻸﻣ ﻼح )‪:(1‬اﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ )‪ :(2‬اﻟﺤ ﺼﻰ )‪ ((4‬وﺗﺮاﻋ ﻰ‬
‫أﻓﻘﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺐ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‪ ،‬وﻳﺮاﻋ ﻰ آ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠ ﺔ اﻟﺨﺮﺳ ﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴ ﺎﻩ‬
‫واﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻨﻔﺎص ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻮ اﻟﺤﺎر ووﺿﻊ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺗﻤﺪد ﺑﺴﻤﻚ )‪1‬ﺳﻢ( آ ﻞ ﺛﻼﺛ ﺔ أﻣﺘ ﺎر ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻤﺤ ﻮر اﻟﻄ ﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺳﺎس أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ وأﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺖ واﻟﺮﻣ ﻞ ﺑﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻂ )ﺳﻤﻨﺖ )‪ : (1‬رﻣﻞ )‪ ((3‬واﻟﻬ ﺪف ﻣﻨﻬ ﺎ ه ﻮ ﺗ ﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﻴﺐ أﺣﺠ ﺎر اﻟﺮﺻ ﻒ وﻻ ﻳﺰﻳ ﺪ ﺳ ﻤﻚ اﻟﻤﻮﻧ ﺔ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫)‪3‬ﺳﻢ( وﺗﻜﻮن ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ )ﻣﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﻔﻠﺔ( )ﺑﺴﻴﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ أو ﺑﻨﺎء أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ وﻳﺮاﻋﻰ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻷﺣﺠﺎر )اﻟﺤﻠ ﻮل( ﻋ ﻦ )‪1‬ﺳ ﻢ( وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗ ﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ واﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ وآﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ أﻓﻘﻴﺔ اﻷﺣﺠﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ ﻓﺮع هﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‬/‫ اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬/‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‬
0.15 m Drainage hole through

0.12 m the curbstone, d=75mm Cement Concrete shoulder
@ 10 meters. Expansion joints @ 3 m
1.0 m 2% 1.5 m
0.15 m
0.10 m 0.08m
2:1
0.15 m
0.10 m 0.08m
Planted area
0.30 m
10 cm Asphaltic concrete.
Tack coat.
15 cm stabilized base course.
Prime coat.
45 cm granular sub-base coarse (min. C.B.R.=35% @ min. 95% subgrade compaction).
Compacted subgrade (min. 95% compaction).
13
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻸ اﻟﻔﻮاﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻷﺣﺠﺎر ﺑﻤﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺖ واﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ )ﺳﻤﻨﺖ )‪ : (1‬رﻣﻞ )‪.((3‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ ﺑﻄﻮل )‪1‬ﻣﺘﺮ( ﻟﻠﺨﻄ ﻮط اﻟﻤ ﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬أﻣ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴ ﺎت ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ اﺳ ﺘﻌﻤﺎل أﺣﺠ ﺎر‬
‫رﺻ ﻒ ﺑﻄ ﻮل أﻗ ﻞ‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴ ﺎت ذات أﻧ ﺼﺎف اﻷﻗﻄ ﺎر اﻟ ﺼﻐﻴﺮة )‪2‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻓﺄﻗ ﻞ( ﻓﻴﻔ ﻀﻞ ﺻ ﺐ أﺣﺠ ﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺮﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺎ آﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(Prime Coat‬‬

‫ﻓﻮاﺋﺪ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻬﻴﺆ ﺳﻄﺤﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎذ اﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺼﺎق ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻬﻴﺆ ﺳﻄﺤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑ ً‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﻓﺠﻮات ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜ ﻮن ﻣ ﺎدة ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ أﺳ ﻔﻠﺖ )‪ (100-85‬وﻧﻔ ﻂ أﺑ ﻴﺾ )آﻴﺮوﺳ ﻴﻦ( ﺑﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺧﻠ ﻂ ﺣﺠﻤﻴ ﺔ‬
‫)‪1.5‬أﺳ ﻔﻠﺖ‪1:‬آﻴﺮوﺳ ﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻳﻌﻤ ﻞ اﻟ ﻨﻔﻂ اﻷﺑ ﻴﺾ هﻨ ﺎ آﻤ ﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻸﺳ ﻔﻠﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳ ﻂ اﻟﺘﻄ ﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪.(Medium Curing‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل رش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮاوح ﻣﻌﺪل رش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1.2-0.5‬ﻟﺘﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ وهﺬا اﻟﻤﻌﺪل ذو ﻣﺠﺎل واﺳﻊ وﻟﻜ ﻦ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻮاﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺰداد اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ زﻳﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺰداد اﻟﻤﻌﺪل ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﺺ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺰداد اﻟﻤﻌﺪل ﻓﻲ درﺟﺎت اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻚ وﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟـ )‪.(Prime Coat‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻔﺎف ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ أن اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺘﺮق ﺳﻄﺤﺎ رﻃﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮش ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ إﻟﻰ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة ﺗﺘﺮاوح ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 85-60‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺒ ﺪأ اﻟ ﺮش ﺑﻌ ﺮض ‪ 25‬ﺳ ﻢ ﺑﺠﺎﻧ ﺐ أﺣﺠ ﺎر اﻟﺮﺻ ﻒ ﻳ ﺪوﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻤ ﻮزع اﻟﻴ ﺪوي أﻣ ﺎ ﺑ ﺎﻗﻲ ﻋ ﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ رﺷ ﻪ ﺑﻤ ﺎدة اﻟﺘ ﺸﺮب اﻷوﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺮآﺒ ﺔ ﺣﻮﺿ ﻴﺔ ﺣﺎوﻳ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻤ ﺎدة اﻟﻼﺻ ﻘﺔ‪ ،‬وذﻟ ﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي اﺗﺴﺎخ أﺣﺠﺎر اﻟﺮﺻﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ أﻣﺎ ﺑ ﺎﻗﻲ ﻋ ﺮض اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ ﺗﻘ ﺴﻴﻤﻪ إﻟ ﻰ أﺟ ﺰاء وﻳ ﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋ ﻦ ‪15‬ﺳ ﻢ وﻻ ﻳ ﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘ ﺪاﺧﻞ ﻓ ﻲ اﻻﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ اﻟﻌﺮﺿ ﻲ‬
‫أي أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻌﺪل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺮش ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﺮش ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺠﻮ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 15‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ وأﺛﻨﺎء هﻄﻮل اﻷﻣﻄﺎر واﻟ ﻀﺒﺎب‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﻤﺸﺮف‪.‬‬ ‫إّ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻓﻮق ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺮب اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (Prime Coat‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮور ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ رﺷﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد أﻣﺎآﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ زﻳﺎدة ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮش ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬ ﺎ ﻗﺒ ﻞ وﺿ ﻊ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﺎس )‪(Base Course‬‬
‫وذﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ رﻣﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺎوي ﻋﻠ ﻰ زﻳ ﺎدة ﻓ ﻲ آﻤﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﺎدة اﻟﺘ ﺸﺮب اﻷوﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺛ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ رﻓﻌ ﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬وإذا آﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻤﺎدة ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎدة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل رﻣﻞ ﻋﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺿﻄﺮار إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻓ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺪاوﻣ ﺔ ﺻ ﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺷ ﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻠﻴ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﺎء آ ﻞ ﻳ ﻮﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫وﻓﺎﺋﺪة اﻟﻤﺎء هﻨﺎ هﻮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ رﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ ﻋﺎزﻟ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ اﻟ ـ )‪ (Prime Coat‬وإﻃ ﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮآﺒ ﺎت اﻟ ﺬي ﻳﻤﻨ ﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ )‪(Tack Coat‬‬
‫ﺗ ﺮﺑﻂ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺎت اﻟﺨﺮﺳ ﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻗ ﺪ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﺎس )‪ (Base Course‬أو اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ )‪ (Binder Course‬أو اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ أو )‪.(Wearing Course‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻠﺖ )‪ (100-85‬ﻣﻊ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎت اﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ اﻟﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮ )‪(Motor Spirit‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺣﺠﻤﻴﺔ )‪2‬أﺳﻔﻠﺖ‪ (Motor Spirit1:‬وﺗﻌﻤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺎدة آﻤﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻠﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ اﻟﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮ) ‪Rapid‬‬
‫‪.(Curing‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل رش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮاوح ﻣﻌﺪل رش ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ‪ 0.5-0.15‬ﻟﺘ ﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﻣﺮﺑ ﻊ وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ه ﺬا اﻟﻤﻌ ﺪل ﺑﻨ ﺎ ًء ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻔﺘ ﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس واﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﺮش ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺠﻮ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 15‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ وأﺛﻨﺎء هﻄﻮل اﻷﻣﻄﺎر واﻟ ﻀﺒﺎب‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﻤﺸﺮف‪.‬‬ ‫إّ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤ ﺔ واﻟﻐﺒ ﺎر ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺿ ﻮاﻏﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮاء‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﻢ رش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺎدة إﻟﻰ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة ‪ 85-65‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوث ﻏﺒﺎر ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺮش ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔ ﺎ ﺟﻴ ﺪا ﺑ ﻀﻮاﻏﻂ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء ﺗﻼﻓﻴ ﺎ ﻟﻮﺟ ﻮد ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻋﺎزﻟ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻓ ﺮش ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺨﺮﺳ ﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ اﻟ ﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ )‪ (Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete‬ﻓ ﻮق ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟ ـ‬
‫)‪ (Tack Coat‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮور ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷآﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎن ﺣﺼﻮل اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺑ ﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ واﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬زﻳﺎدة ﻣﻌﺪل رش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﺣﺪوث اﻻﻧﻔ ﺼﺎل ﺑ ﺪﻻ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺘﻤﺎﺳ ﻚ اﻟﻤﻄﻠ ﻮب إﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ إﻟ ﻰ ﺣ ﺪوث‬
‫ﻇﺎهﺮة اﻟﻨﻀﺢ أو اﻟﻨﺰف )‪ (Bleeding‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ) ‪(Stabilized Base Course‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ) ‪ ( Binder Course‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ) ‪( Surface or wearing Course‬‬
‫‪ -1‬اﻟﻤﻮاد‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻜ ﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﺨ ﺸﻦ واﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﻨ ﺎﻋﻢ واﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟﻤﺎﻟﺌ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﻤ ﺎدة اﻟﺮاﺑﻄ ﺔ وه ﻲ‬
‫ل ﻣ ﻦ اﻷﻃﻴ ﺎن ) ‪ ( Clay‬واﻟﺠ ﺒﺲ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺮآﺎم ذو ﻧﻮﻋﻴ ﺔ ﺟﻴ ﺪة ودﻳﻤﻮﻣ ﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ وﺧ ﺎ ٍ‬
‫) ‪ ( Gypsum‬واﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪.( Organic Matter‬‬
‫أ( اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﺨﺸﻦ ) ‪ :( Coarse Aggregate‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ اﻟﺮآﺎم ﺧﺸﻨﺎ ﻓ ﻲ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋ ﻪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ )‪ (4‬ﻗﻴ ﺎس‬
‫)‪ 4.75‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﻓﺄآﺒﺮ‪ .‬وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﺨ ﺸﻦ ﻣﻜ ﺴﺮة ) ‪ ( Crushed‬وﻣﻜﻮﻧ ﺔ إﻣ ﺎ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺤﺠ ﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﺴﺮ ) ‪ ( Crushed Stone‬أو اﻟﺤﺼﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺴﺮ ) ‪ ( Crushed Gravel‬ه ﺬا ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺘ ﻴﻦ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ‪ .‬أﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮآﺎم اﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن إﻣﺎ ﻣﻜﺴﺮا أو ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺴﺮ أو ﺧﻠ ﻴﻂ ﻣﻨﻬﻤ ﺎ‪ .‬إن‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻤﻜﺴﺮ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ %90‬وزﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ )‪4.75) (4‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ(‬
‫وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺔ اﻟﺮآﺎم ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ وﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻜ ﺴﺎرة وﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ أو اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻄﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض آﻨﺴﺒﺔ )‪ (5 : 1‬ﻋﻦ ‪.%10‬‬
‫وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎن ﻓﻲ وزن اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻋﻦ ‪ %12‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺮات ﻓﻲ ﻣ ﺎدة‬
‫) ‪ ( Sodium Sulfate‬أو ﻋﻦ ‪ %18‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎدة ) ‪.( Magnesium sulfate‬‬
‫ب( اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ) ‪ :( Fine Aggregate‬وهﻮ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﻌﺎﺑﺮ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺨ ﻞ رﻗ ﻢ )‪4.75) (4‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ( واﻟ ﺬي ﻳﺠ ﺐ‬
‫أن ﻳﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ وﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ وﺟ ﻮب آﻮﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺣﺒﻴﺒ ﺎت ﺣ ﺎدة اﻟﺤﺎﻓ ﺎت‬
‫وﺻﻠﺒﺔ وذات دﻳﻤﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ج( اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺎﻟﺌﺔ )‪ :( Mineral Filler‬اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺎﻟﺌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن إﻣﺎ ﻏﺒﺎر اﻟﺤﺠﺮ أو ﻣﺎدة اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺖ اﻟﺒﻮرﺗﻼﻧﺪي‬
‫أو اﻟﻨﻮرة اﻟﻤﻬﺪرﺟﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺎﻟﺌﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ وﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ‪ .‬أﻣ ﺎ ﺗ ﺪرج ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد‬
‫ﻓﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫)‪Sieve Size (mm‬‬ ‫‪% Passing by weight‬‬
‫)‪0.600 (No. 30‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫)‪0.300 (No. 50‬‬ ‫‪95-100‬‬
‫)‪0.075 (No. 200‬‬ ‫‪70-100‬‬
‫ل ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ وﻻ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻓﻴﻪ رﻏﻮة ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗ ﺴﺨﻴﻨﻪ إﻟ ﻰ‬ ‫د( ﻣﺎدة اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ وﺧﺎ ٍ‬
‫درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة ‪ 180‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺤﻘﻖ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ ﻓﺮع هﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‬/‫ اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬/‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻄﺮق واﻟﺠﺴﻮر‬
Requirements for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement
(Grading Base on Original Asphalt)
Viscosity Grade
Property
AC-40 AC-30 AC-20
Viscosity, 60C, poises 4000±800 3000±600 2000±400
o
Viscosity, 135 C, Cs-minimum 400 350 300
o
Penetration, 25 C, 5sec., 0.1mm minimum 40 50 60
o
Flash point, C minimum 232 232 232
Solubility in trichloroethylene, percent-minimum 99 99 99
Tests on residue from thin-film oven test:
Viscosity, 60 oC, poises-maximum 20000 15000 10000
o
Ductility, 25 C 5cm per minute cm-minimum 25 40 50
Requirements for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement

Penetration Grade of Asphalt
Property
40/50 50/60 60/70
o
1- Penetration at 25 C, 100gm, 5sec., (1/10mm) 40-50 50-60 60-70
o
2- Ductility at 25 C, 5cm/min., (cm) >100 >100 >100
o
3- Flash Point, C >232 >232 >232
4- Solubility in trichloroethylene, (%) >99 >99 >99
5- Residue from thin-film oven test:
- Retained Penetration, % of Original >55 >53 >52
o
- Ductility at 25 C, 5cm/min. (cm) >25 >40 >50
‫ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد‬،‫ اﻟﺮآ ﺎم اﻟﻨ ﺎﻋﻢ‬،‫ ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮآﺎم اﻟﺨ ﺸﻦ‬:‫هـ( ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﺰج ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺬآﻮرة ﺁﻧﻔ ﺎ ﻣﻮﺿ ﺤﺔ‬.‫ واﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ واﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ‬،‫اﻟﻤﺎﻟﺌﺔ‬
:‫أدﻧﺎﻩ‬
Asphalt Mixture Grading
Type I Type II Type IIIA Type IIIB
Binder or
Sieve Size Sieve Size Base Surface or Wearing
Leveling
(inch) (mm) Course Course
Course
% Passing by Weight of Total Aggregate + Filler
1½ 37.5 100
1 25.0 90-100 100
¾ 19.0 76-90 90-100 100
½ 12.5 56-80 70-90 90-100 100
⅜ 9.5 48-74 56-80 76-90 90-100
No. 4 4.75 29-59 35-65 44-74 55-85
No. 8 2.36 19-45 23-49 28-58 32-67
No. 50 300μm 5-17 5-19 5-21 7-23
No. 200 75μm 2-8 3-9 4-10 4-10
18
‫‪Asphalt Cement (% by‬‬
‫‪3-5.5‬‬ ‫‪4-6‬‬ ‫‪4-6‬‬ ‫‪4-6‬‬
‫)‪Weight of Total mix‬‬
‫أﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺐ اﻻﺧﺘﻼف اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻬﻨ ﺪس اﻟﻤﺨ ﺘﺺ ﻓﻤﻮﺿ ﺤﺔ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Job Mix Formula Tolerances‬‬
‫‪Tolerance‬‬
‫‪Aggregate Passing Sieve 4.75mm (No.4) or larger‬‬ ‫‪±6.0%‬‬
‫)‪Aggregate Passing Sieve 2.36mm (No.8) to 0.3mm (No.50‬‬ ‫‪±4.0%‬‬
‫)‪Filler Passing Sieve 0.075mm (No.200‬‬ ‫‪±2.0%‬‬
‫‪Asphalt Cement‬‬ ‫‪±0.3%‬‬
‫‪Mix Temperature‬‬ ‫‪±15oC‬‬
‫وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رﺻﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﺎرﺷﺎل ﺑـ ‪ 75‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ وﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Properties of Asphalt Concrete Mixtures‬‬

‫‪Base‬‬ ‫‪Binder‬‬ ‫‪Surface‬‬
‫‪Property‬‬
‫‪Course‬‬ ‫‪Course‬‬ ‫‪Course‬‬
‫‪Resistance to Plastic Flow (ASTM D1559),‬‬
‫‪75Blows/End‬‬
‫‪- Marshal Stability (KN), Minimum‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫)‪- Marshal Flow (mm‬‬ ‫‪2-4‬‬ ‫‪2-4‬‬ ‫‪2-4‬‬
‫)‪Voids in Marshal Specimen (%‬‬ ‫‪3-6‬‬ ‫‪3-5‬‬ ‫‪3-5‬‬
‫‪Voids in Mineral Aggregate (%), Minimum‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫)‪Immersion-Compression (ASTM D1075‬‬
‫‪Index of Retained Strength (%), Minimum‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬
‫‪ -2‬اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨ ﺔ ﻳﺠ ﺐ اﻟﺘﺄآ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓ ﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴ ﺔ وﻓ ﻲ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ وﺟ ﻮد‬
‫أﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﻀﻮاﻏﻂ اﻟﻬﻮاء وﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺳ ﻜﺔ ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬ ﺎ ﻗﺒ ﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷ ﺮة‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻮاﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻓﺤ ﺺ‬
‫اﺳ ﺘﻮاﺋﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤ ﺴﻄﺮة أﻟﻮﻣﻨﻴ ﻮم ﺑﻄ ﻮل ‪ 4‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ وﻻ ﻳ ﺴﻤﺢ اﺧ ﺘﻼف أآﺜ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ‪10‬ﻣﻠ ﻢ ﺑ ﻴﻦ أﺳ ﻔﻞ اﻟﻤ ﺴﻄﺮة وﺳ ﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ آﻮن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻔﺎرﺷ ﺎت )‪(Spreaders or Pavers‬‬
‫واﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺻﻮرﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻬﻢ اﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ اﻻﻋﺘﺒ ﺎر ﺑﻌ ﺾ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈ ﺎت ﺣ ﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ وهﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫* ﻳﻔﻀﻞ أن ﺗﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻋﻨﺪ وﺻﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺮآﺒﺎت اﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫)اﻟﻠﻮرﻳﺎت( )‪.(Loaders‬‬
‫* ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ وﺿ ﻌﻬﺎ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷ ﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘ ﻞ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ 120‬درﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ اﻷﺳﺎس اﻟﺮاﺑﻄﺔ وﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 130‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﻓ ﺎرق ﻳ ﺴﻤﺢ ﺑ ﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ أﺧﺬ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﻤﺸﺮف وهﻮ ‪ 10±‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ رﻓﺾ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ إﻟﻰ أﺟﺰاء ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻔﻀﻞ أن ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻔﺮش اﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻪ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮك ﺟ ﺰء إﻟ ﻰ اﻟﻴ ﻮم اﻟﺘ ﺎﻟﻲ ﻓ ﻼ ﺑ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﻗﻄ ﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ رش هﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ )‪.(Tack Coat‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﺮﻓﻊ واﻟﺨﻔﺾ اﻟ ﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﺎرﺷ ﺔ ﻟﺘﻌ ﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﻴﺐ وأن ﻳ ﺘﻢ ذﻟ ﻚ ﺗ ﺪرﻳﺠﻴﺎ وﺑ ﺒﻂء ﻟﺘﺠﻨ ﺐ ﺣ ﺪوث ﻋ ﺪم‬
‫اﺳﺘﻮاﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻓﺎرﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ واﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺮاﻋﻰ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 6-3‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻮﻗﻮف اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻟﻠﻔﺎرﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﺳ ﺘﻮاء‬
‫اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫* أﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﻤﻚ ﻟﻔﺮش هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت هﻮ ‪10‬ﺳﻢ وﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ زﻳﺎدة اﻟﺴﻤﻚ ﻋﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى إﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻤ ﺎم إﻧﻬ ﺎء ﺣ ﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻔﻠﻰ وﺑﺮودﺗﻬ ﺎ إﻟ ﻰ درﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮارة اﻟﺠ ﻮ ورﺷ ﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻔﺮش ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻﻧﻀﻐﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻤﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺤ ﺪل‬
‫ﺑﻨﻈﺮ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر وﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %20‬زﻳﺎدة ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ وإذا آﺎن ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﻴﺐ ﻗﺒ ﻞ وﺑﻌ ﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪل‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻔﻀﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﻄﺮة اﻷﻟﻮﻣﻨﻴﻮم أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻔﺮش وﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ أي ﻋﺪم اﺳ ﺘﻮاء ﻓ ﻲ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ وﻻ ﺑ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻔﺮش ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻀﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد رﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﻼﺻ ﻘﺔ ﻗﺒ ﻞ اﻟ ﺴﻤﺎح ﺑ ﺎﻟﻔﺮش ﻷن ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣ ﻊ وﺟ ﻮد‬
‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ اﻟﺘﺮاﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮور ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ أو ﻓﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻗﺒﻞ وﺻﻮل درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ إﻟ ﻰ درﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮارة‬
‫اﻟﺠﻮ أو ﻣﺮور ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ إﻧﻬﺎء ﺣﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ أﻳﻬﻤﺎ أﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻔﺮش اﻟﻴﺪوي ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت اﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻷﺟﻞ اﻟﻔﺮش اﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻔﺮش ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻀﻴﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺷﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺑﺎت وﻣﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺘﻤﺪد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺴﻮر‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﺠﻮات ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ إﻣﺎ ﻟﻌﻴﻮب ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺔ أو ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﺬا‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻔﺠﻮات‪.‬‬
‫* زﻳﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟﺨ ﺸﻨﺔ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ )اﻟﺤ ﺼﻰ( ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟ ﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴ ﺬ )ﻗﻠ ﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻟﺘ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ (Low Workability‬وﻣﻈﻬﺮهﺎ اﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬وأﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ زﻳﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤ ﻮاد اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤ ﺔ ﺗﺒ ﺪو اﻟﺨﻠﻄ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮن ﺑﻨﻲ وﻟﺬا ﻓﻲ آﻠﺘﺎ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ اﻹﺳﺮاع ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄآ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺘ ﺪرج ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻼزم ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫* ﺗﺮاﻋﻰ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﺣ ﻮل ﻓﺘﺤ ﺎت اﻟﻤﺠ ﺎري اﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮدة ﻓ ﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب أﻏﻄﻴﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎت‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺮاﻋﻰ ﻣﻠﺊ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت اﻟﻤ ﺄﺧﻮذة ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﻓ ﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻘ ﺔ وﻳﻔ ﻀﻞ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﻔ ﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺨﻠﻴﻂ وﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﺨﻠﻴﻂ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ وﺣﺪﻟﻪ ﺟﻴﺪا وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ أﻳ ﻀﺎ ﻣﻠ ﺊ ه ﺬﻩ اﻷﻣ ﺎآﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﺴﻤﻨﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﻘ ﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺪل إﻟ ﻰ ﺛ ﻼث ﻣﺮاﺣ ﻞ‪ :‬وه ﻲ اﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻷوﻟ ﻲ أو اﻻﺑﺘ ﺪاﺋﻲ اﻟ ﺬي ﺗﻘ ﻮم ﺑ ﻪ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷ ﺔ‬
‫) ‪ ( Paver‬واﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ذات اﻹﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳ ﺔ اﻟﻤﻠ ﺴﺎء زﻧ ﺔ ‪ 12-2‬ﻃ ﻦ )إﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻣﺎﻣﻴ ﺔ وأﺧ ﺮى‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴ ﺔ(‪ ،‬واﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻟﺮﺋﻴ ﺴﻲ اﻟ ﺬي ﺗﻘ ﻮم ﺑ ﻪ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ذات اﻹﻃ ﺎرات اﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴ ﺔ زﻧ ﺔ ‪ 20-10‬ﻃ ﻦ )ﻋ ﺪد‬
‫اﻟﻌﺠﻼت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5-2‬ﻋﺠﻠ ﺔ وﻋ ﺪد اﻟﻌﺠ ﻼت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ‪ 7-3‬ﻋﺠﻠ ﺔ( واﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬ ﺎ ﺑﺤﻤﻮﻟ ﺔ‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻃﻦ وﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﺳ ﺮﻋﺔ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﺑ ﻴﻦ ‪5-3‬آ ﻢ‪/‬ﺳ ﺎﻋﺔ وﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﻜ ﻮن‬
‫درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﺑﻬ ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴ ﻖ ذﻟ ﻚ ﺑ ﺄن‬
‫ﺗﻜ ﻮن اﻟﺤﺎدﻟ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣ ﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪100-50‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﺧﻠ ﻒ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷ ﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﺤ ﺪل اﻟﻨﻬ ﺎﺋﻲ اﻟ ﺬي ﺗﻘ ﻮم ﺑ ﻪ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ذات‬
‫اﻹﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳ ﺔ اﻟﻤﻠ ﺴﺎء زﻧ ﺔ ‪ 16-3‬ﻃ ﻦ )إﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻣﺎﻣﻴ ﺔ وإﺳ ﻄﻮاﻧﺘﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻴ ﺔ( وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 2.5‬ﻃﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺘﺎز هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﺪرﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧ ﺘﻢ أو ﺣ ﺪل اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺻ ﻞ اﻟﻤﺘﻜﻮﻧ ﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠ ﺔ ﺗﻘ ﺴﻴﻢ ﻋ ﺮض اﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ إﻟ ﻰ أﺟ ﺰاء ﺑﺎﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ إﻟ ﻰ ﻗ ﺪرﺗﻬﺎ اﻟ ﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻌﻼﻣ ﺎت اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺤ ﺪﺛﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺘﻴﻦ اﻷوﻟﻰ واﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺪل وذﻟ ﻚ ﻹﻋﻄ ﺎء ﺳ ﻄﺢ ﻣ ﺴﺘ ٍﻮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘ ﺎت اﻷﺳ ﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ وﻳﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ أن‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺳﺮﻋﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ‪10-6‬آ ﻢ‪/‬ﺳ ﺎﻋﺔ وﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣ ﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 120-80‬ﻣﺘ ﺮ ﺧﻠ ﻒ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷ ﺔ‪ ،‬وﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺠ ﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬآﺮ ﺑﺄن ﻋﺪد اﻻﺟﺘﻴﺎزات ﻟﻠﺤﺪل اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻮهﺎت أو اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت وﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺑﻌ ﺪهﺎ‬
‫أن ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل إذا أﻣﻜﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻠﻴﻂ ﻟﻤﺪة أﻃﻮل ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ أن ﺗﺒﺪأ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎً ودرﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارﺗﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﺎ ﺗ ﺰال أﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣ ﻦ ‪70‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺤﺪوﻟﺔ ﺣﺪ ً‬
‫درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺠﺐ إﺗﺨﺎذ إﺟﺮاءات ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺳ ﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﺒﻠ ﻴﻂ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟ ﻨﻔﻂ ) ‪ ( Oil‬أو اﻟ ﺸﺤﻮم ) ‪ ( Grease‬أو‬
‫ي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎت اﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ أو ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮهﺎ‪.‬‬‫أ ٍ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓ ﻲ اﻷﻣ ﺎآﻦ اﻟ ﻀﻴﻘﺔ اﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻻ ﺗ ﺼﻞ إﻟﻴﻬ ﺎ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت ﻳ ﺘﻢ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺣ ﺎدﻻت ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴ ﺔ ﻳﺪوﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ف‪ .‬ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤ ﺎدﻻت اﻟ ﺼﻐﻴﺮة ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﻘ ﻞ وزﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻋ ﻦ‬ ‫ل آﺎ ٍ‬‫) ‪ ( Hand Tamper‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻹﻋﻄ ﺎء ﺣ ﺪ ٍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪15‬آﻐﻢ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﺮص ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ رص ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪30‬ﺳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪل اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت )اﻷﻗﻮاس اﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻤﻤﺮ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ وﻳﺠﺐ إﺟﺮاء اﻹﺟﺘﻴ ﺎزات‬
‫ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪل اﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻺﺳ ﺘﺪارة ﻓﺈﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ‬
‫آﺠﺪار ﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﺰﻳﺞ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻨﻔ ﺎذ إﻟ ﻰ اﻟ ﺪاﺧﻞ‪ .‬إن ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﺤ ﺪل ﺿ ﺮورﻳﺔ ﻋﻨ ﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت اﻟﻤﺠﺎورة ﻟﻠﺘﻼل أو اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎت اﻟﺠﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ أو اﻟﻤﻄﺎرات ﻳﺼﺎر إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﺎرﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ اﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﻴ ﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺜﻼ إﻟﻰ ﺟﺰأﻳﻦ وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﺮش‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪأ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﺑﺤ ﺎدﻟﺘﻴﻦ واﻟ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ أن ﻳﺒ ﺪأ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪل ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ وﻳﺘﺮك ﻣﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ ﺑﻌﺮض ‪ 20-15‬ﺳﻢ ﻟﻴﺤﺪل ﺑﻤﺮآﺰ إﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺤﺎدﻟ ﺔ ذات‬
‫اﻹﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﺴﺎء آﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أي ﺁﺛﺎر ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻔﺎرﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻮذﺟﻴﻦ ) ‪ ( Core‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻳﻮم ﻋﻤﻞ وﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎس ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل ﻟﻬﺬﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ ﺣ ﺪل آ ﻞ ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ )أي ﻃﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻷﺳ ﺎس واﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻄ ﺔ واﻟﻄﺒﻘ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ( ﻳﺠ ﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﻘ ﻞ ﻋ ﻦ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫‪ %97‬ﻣﻦ آﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎرﺷﺎل اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رص ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﺎرﺷﺎل ﺑـ ‪ 75‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ وﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ وﺟﻬﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺤﺎدﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﺪر ﻗﻮي ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪل آﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ وﻗﻮع ﺣﻮادث‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺤﺪدات اﻟﻄﻘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻓﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻮ اﻟﻤﻤﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﺪم ﻓﺮش اﻟﺨﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺠﻤﺪ أو ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻔﺮش اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻞ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺠﻮ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ 5‬درﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ أو ﺣ ﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬ ﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﻤﺸﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ درﺟﺔ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺴﻤﻚ‪ ،‬اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬وﻋﺪم اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪:‬‬
‫أ( ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﺒﻠﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺪل آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ واﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﻋﺪم اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺗﺮش ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ وأي ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻋﺪم‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺪم اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﺑﺪون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎول‪.‬‬
‫ب( اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺼﻮل ﻧﻘﺼﺎن ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﻚ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪3‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺒﻮل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬أﻣﺎ‬
‫إذا آﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻤﻚ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪3‬ﻣﻠﻢ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ‪10‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺒﻮل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﻠﻎ اﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮع ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎول‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﻔﻘﺮة‪ ،‬أﻣﺎ إذا زاد اﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎن ﻋﻦ ‪10‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻓﻌﻨﺪذاك ﻳﺘﻢ رﻓﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ وﻗﻠﻌﻬﺎ وإﺑﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺑﺪون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ آﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ج( ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ذو ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﺧﺸﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﺎذ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ ،‬وﻳﺠﺐ آﺬﻟﻚ أن ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺧﺎدﻳﺪ واﻟﻨﺰف واﻟﺘﺸﻘﻘﺎت واﻟﺘﻔﺘﺘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫د( اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻣﺪون ﻓﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Course‬‬ ‫‪Tolerance‬‬
‫‪Surface Course‬‬ ‫‪±4.0mm‬‬
‫‪Binder Course‬‬ ‫‪±6.0mm‬‬
‫‪Base Course‬‬ ‫‪+8mm to –20mm‬‬
‫‪Sub-base Course‬‬ ‫‪+10mm to –20mm‬‬
‫هـ( اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺘﻮاء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﺒﺎر اﻻﺳﺘﻮاء ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﺴﻄﺮة أﻟﻮﻣﻨﻴﻮم ﺑﻄﻮل ‪4‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻮر اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ أو ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺮة وﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﺒﻠﻴﻂ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪3‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫و( اﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻴﻮل اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ %0.3‬ﻋﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆدي إﻟﻰ رﻓﺾ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﺪم ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﺨﻠﻂ أو ﺳﺒﺒﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺢ ﻣﺴﺘ ٍﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻼب وﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ هﺮﻣﻲ ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ زﻳﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺎت ﺑﺴﻄ ٍ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺠﻤﻌﺎت ﺿﻤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ دﺧﺎن أزرق ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ اﺣﺘﺮاﻗﻬﺎ وﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎس درﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮارﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ زﻳﺎدﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ) ‪ ( Flash Point‬ﻳﺠﺐ رﻓﺾ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬إﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻟﻤﻌﺎن ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺮآﺎم وﻣﻴﻞ ﻟﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﻳﺪل أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳـﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗــﺑﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ – ١‬ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻗﺑﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺿﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺟﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ) ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ – ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ـ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ –ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ ) ‪ (( CBR‬ﻭﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻲ– ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ، ٢٠٠ #‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ( ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ (‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺧﻳﺭﺍ ً ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻘﺑﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺽ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﻥ ﻭﻣﺗﻰ ﻭﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺃﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – ٣‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﺍﻋﺗﻣـﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣـﺎ ﻳﻠــﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻫﻳﻠﻳﺔ ‪. Qualifying Samples‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺗـﺎﺝ ‪. Job Control Samples‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﺻﻝ ‪. Split Samples‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪. Information Samples‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗـﺄﻛﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ‪. Laboratory Check Samples‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﻭﻝ ‪. Acceptance Samples‬‬
‫‪ - ١ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻫﻳﻠﻳﺔ ‪. Qualifying Samples‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻫﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻓﻠﺗﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ٢ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪. Job Control Samples‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ٣ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﺻﻝ ‪. Split Samples‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻟﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ٤ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛـﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ‪. Laboratory Check Samples‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻭﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻳﻣﺛﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – ٥ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪. Information Samples‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻳﻧـﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻹﻳﺿﺎﺡ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻓﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ٦ – ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﻭﻝ ‪. Acceptance Samples‬‬
‫ﺗـﺅﺧﺫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – ٤‬ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺑﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻـﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳـﺫﻫـﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗـﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗـﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪( ١‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨــــﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫‪1-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻡ ‪1-‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫‪50‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ‪٥٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮﺭﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫‪CBR‬‬ ‫ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٥٠‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺻﻒ (‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪2-‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻡ ‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٥‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫) ‪Subgrade‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫‪3-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺒﺔ‬
‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٢٠‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘـﺔ‬ ‫‪4-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻛـﻞ‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٢٠‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪1-‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٥‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪2-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪2-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸـﺂﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫‪3-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘـﺔ ﻛـﻞ‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٢٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٢‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪٧٥‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪35‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪1-‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٣‬ﺭ‪١‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪2-‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٣‬ﺭ‪١‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺪﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪3-‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪4-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺒﺔ ‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪3-‬ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ‪5-‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮﺭﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪CBR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫‪6-‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻁﺒﻘـﺔ ﻛـﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪٢٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٢‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪7-‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻚ‬
‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪8-‬ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٣‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪9-‬ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ ‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٣‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪10-‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٠٠٠‬ﺭ‪١٠‬ﻡ‪٠٠٠ ٣‬ﺭ‪ ٢‬ﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‬
‫– ‪5‬ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺘﻮﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫‪1-‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻋﺎء‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻳﻮﻡ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ )‬
‫ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ )‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪٥٠‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪1-‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ‬
‫(ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪١٥‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪2-‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪3-‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫‪4-‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪١٠‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺖ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪6-‬ﻁﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫(ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺘﻲ )‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺘﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫‪5-‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪١٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪6-‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪١٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪7-‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪1-‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺮﺓ ‪٢٥‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪2-‬ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪7-‬ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪3-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﻰء‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺘﻮﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫(ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ )‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪4-‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺪﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫‪5-‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪1-‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭ‪١٠‬ﻟﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪١٥‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪2-‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻳـﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪8-‬ﻁﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪3-‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪10‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪٥٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫‪4-‬ﻣﺤـﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺘﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛـﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓـﻠﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪٥٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫‪5-‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛـﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬ـ‪ ١‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪Water Content‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻟﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻣﻭﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤٫٤‬ﺳﻡ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺷﻳﻭﻋﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﺟﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻼ ﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺻﻝ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪٥ – ٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺑﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ً ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ) ‪ ، ( WW‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻣـﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳـﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟـﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑـﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ) ‪: ( WS‬‬
‫‪WW‬‬
‫* =‬
‫‪WS100‬‬
‫‪٪‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪١١٠-١٠٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺑﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻝ ( ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻭﻟﻘﺩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺎﻻً ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺧﺫﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻘﻁ (‬
‫ﻭﻟﻭ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻫﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ﺟﻢ )‬ ‫‪( 95 – 100 /‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺨﻞ ﺭﻗـﻢ )‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗـﻢ ‪٤‬‬
‫‪10 – 50‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪300‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢-٥‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ) ‪Limit PL ) Liquid Limit (LL) And Plastic‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺣـﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﺛﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣـﻭﻉ ﺧﻣﺳـﺔ ﺣـﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺿﻬـﺎ ﺍﻟﻌـﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻳـﺩﻱ ﺃ‪ .‬ﺃﺗـﺭﺑـﺭﺝ‬
‫)‪ (A.Atterberg‬ﻭﺃﻫـﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ‪ : (Shrinkage Limit (SL‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻔﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ‪ : ( Plastic Limit ( PL‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻟﺩﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪ : ( Liquid limit ( LL‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻭﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻼً ﻟﺯﺟﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ )‪ (SL‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ )‪ (PL‬ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١‬ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻔﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺩﻣﺎﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣـﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪: ( Liquid limit ( LL‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺡ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺭﺝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻠﺗﺣﻡ ﻭﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻛﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪١‬ﺳﻡ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻫـﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑـﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺁﻧﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﺭ ﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻳـﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻫﻣــﺎ ‪- :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﺎﺯﺍﺟﺭﺍﻧﺩ )‪ ) (Cassagrande‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ -٢‬ﺏ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ) ‪ ) ( ASTM‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ -٢‬ﺝ (‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫـﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻣﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻛـﻳﻥ )‪ (Spatula‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣـﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺃ ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺝ )‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺏ )‬

‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪( ٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺯﺍﺟﺭﺍﻧﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ )‪(ASTM‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ، (٤٠‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﻣﺭﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺎ ً ) ‪( Air-dry‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ )‬
‫‪ . ( ASTM D421-58‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺣﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺣﻳﺙ ﺩﻟﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻭﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪-٢‬‬
‫‪ . ٪٦‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪. (٤٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣـﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻏﺎﺭﻳﺛﻣﻲ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺧﻁﺎ ً ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﺎﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ) ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ( ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻧﺻﻑ ﻟﻭﻏﺎﺭﻳﺛﻣﻲ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣـﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ‪: ( Plastic limit ( LL‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺩ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻛﻳﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﻓﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻳﻁ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ) ‪٠٫١٢٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻫـﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ً ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ) ‪٠٫١٢٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺧﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ) ‪٠٫١٢٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﻧﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٪٣-١‬ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ‪: ( Plasticity Index ( PI‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺗﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪PI = LL - PL‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣـﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣـﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ ‪\ .‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻁﺭﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ‪- :‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﺏ ‪- :‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪- :‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ :‬ﻁﻳﻥ ﺑﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺣﺹ ‪ :‬ﺭ‪.‬ﺩ‪.‬ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٤٢٠/٣/١٥ :‬ﻫـ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪33.51‬‬ ‫‪34.79‬‬ ‫‪39.40‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﻢ)‬
‫‪28.08‬‬ ‫‪29.55‬‬ ‫‪34.00‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﻢ)‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ) ﺟﻢ‬
‫‪11.92‬‬ ‫‪11.97‬‬ ‫‪14.95‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪16.16‬‬ ‫‪17.58‬‬ ‫‪19.05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ )ﺟﻢ)‬
‫‪5.43‬‬ ‫‪5.24‬‬ ‫‪5.40‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء )ﺟﻢ)‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪33.6‬‬ ‫‪29.8‬‬ ‫‪28.4‬‬
‫‪٪W‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‪N‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺒﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫‪24.59‬‬ ‫‪24.17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ )ﺟﻢ)‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫‪22.59‬‬ ‫‪23.77‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ )ﺟﻢ )‬
‫‪22.59‬‬ ‫‪21.53‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ) ﺟﻢ )‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪1.70‬‬ ‫‪2.24‬‬
‫)ﺟﻢ )‬
‫‪0.30‬‬ ‫‪0.40‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء )ﺟﻢ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻲ‪٪ W‬‬
‫‪17.7٪‬‬ ‫‪٪ 17.9‬‬
‫‪= Wp‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٣‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺭﺝ‬
‫‪ – ٣ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪Grain Size Distribution‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪Sieve Analysis‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٠٫٠٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ (٢٠٠‬ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻞ‬
‫‪100.00‬‬ ‫ً‪4‬‬
‫‪75.00‬‬ ‫‪ً3‬‬
‫‪50.00‬‬ ‫‪ً2‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬ ‫‪ً 2/1 1‬‬
‫‪25.00‬‬ ‫‪ً1‬‬
‫‪19.00‬‬ ‫‪ً 4/ 3‬‬
‫‪12.5‬‬ ‫‪ً 2/1‬‬
‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫‪ً 8/3‬‬
‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2.00‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪0.850‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪0.425‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫‪0.180‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬
‫‪0.075‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٢‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ ، Hydrometer‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺑﻧﺎءﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪D – 422 & ASTM D-421‬‬
‫‪T – 88 & AASHTO T – 78‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪٠٫١‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ‪٠٫١‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻭﻗﺎﺭﻧﻪ ﺑﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺩ ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻭﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٢٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻣﻳﺗﺭ ( ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ( ٢٠٠‬ﻭﺍﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣـﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌـﺩ ﺗـﺻﻔﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻣﺯﺝ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪١٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪٤‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪ NaP03‬ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﻬﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ١٦-١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻔﻘﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻭﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺛﻲ ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺟﻬﺯ ‪ ١٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪ NaP03‬ﻭﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻣـﺎء ﻣﻘﻁـﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻭﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺄﺱ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺄﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ )‪٦٠‬ﻣﺭﺓ ( ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻣﻳﺗﺭ ﺑﺑﻁء ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺛﻡ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺭﺭ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١١‬ﺛﻡ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻣﻳﺗﺭ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٠ ، ١٦ ، ٨ :‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ ‪، ٣٢ ، ١٦ ، ٨ ، ٤ ، ٢‬‬
‫‪ ٩٦ ، ٦٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻻً ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ‪. ٤‬‬
‫‪ – ٤ – ٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Density of Soil in-place by Sand Cone Method‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻣﻬﺎ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻣﻣﻠﻭء ﺑﺭﻣﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻘﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﻔﺭ ﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﺏ ﻭﺑﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻣﻊ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﻠﻭء ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻘﻠﻭﺑﺎ ً ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺑﻭﺭ ﻹﻧﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺑﻭﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻭﻳﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ= ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء – ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ – ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻣﻸ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﺎﻵﺗـﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ )ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ( = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ‪ ١٠٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ – ٥ – ٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ‪Compaction (Proctor ) Test‬‬
‫‪(d‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ) ‪(dmax‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ( W‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓـﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻅﻣﻰ ‪ ) Maximum Dry Unit Weight‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗـﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑـﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛـﻝ ‪Optimum‬‬
‫‪ (Moisture Content, (OMC‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﻛﺗﻭﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺩﻣﻙ ﻫﻣــﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﻛﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪. Standard Proctor Test‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﻛﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪. Modified Proctor Test‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ً‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ً‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ً‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ً‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪Mold‬‬
‫‪152.4‬‬ ‫‪101.6‬‬ ‫‪152.4‬‬ ‫‪101.60‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ )ﻣﻠﻢ)‬
‫‪116.43‬‬ ‫‪116.43‬‬ ‫‪116.43‬‬ ‫‪116.43‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ)ﻣﻠﻢ)‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪2124‬‬ ‫‪944‬‬ ‫‪2124‬‬ ‫‪944‬‬
‫)ﺳﻢ‪)٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ‬
‫‪44.5‬‬ ‫‪24.5‬‬ ‫‪44.5‬‬ ‫‪24.5‬‬
‫) ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ)‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻉ‬
‫‪457‬‬ ‫‪457‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻡ)‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٣‬ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺫﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺫﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ) ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﻭﻝ ‪/‬ﻡ‪= (٣‬‬
‫)ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ × ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﻡ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ )ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ((‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ )ﻡ‪(٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺫﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ‪١٠١٫٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ = ‪٥٩٣٫٧‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﻭﻝ ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺟﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪ Air Voids Zero‬ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺷﺑﻌﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫‪D – 1557 –78 & ASTM D- 698-78‬‬
‫‪T – 180 –90 & ٩٠- AASHTO T – 99‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪ Method A‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ )‪١٠١٫٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ( ﻭﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧـﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪٤٫٧٥) ٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Method B‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋـﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ )‪١٥٢٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ ( ﻭﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧـﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪٤٫٧٥) ٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ٧‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ‪ Method C‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋـﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ )‪١٠١٫٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ( ﻭﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧـﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩) ٠٫٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ‪ Method D‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋـﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ )‪ ١٥٢٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ ( ﻭﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧـﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩) ٠٫٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ١١‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ‪ Mold‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪ Collar‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪. Base Plate‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ‪ ، Rammer‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ) ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ( ﻭﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬﺯ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٪ ٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ٪٥‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ‪. W1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻣﺱ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻣﻙ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺷﺭﺣﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪. W2‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ) ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪١٠٠‬ﺟﻡ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻣﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺿﻑ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪ ٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻁﻬﻣﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﺃ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺭﻏﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺗﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫= ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ÷ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪wet‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪= d‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ + wet ÷ ( 1‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ (‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ d‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻅﻣﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ، d max‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ)‪. (OMC‬‬
‫‪ – ٦ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ، Unit Weight‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ÷ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء – ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء (‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓـﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ Overburden Pressure‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻧﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﻟﻠﺧﻭﺍﺯﻳﻖ)‪. (Piles‬‬
‫‪ ٧ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ‪(Relative Density (Dr) (ASTM D 4253 , D 4254‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑـﻳﺔ ﻋـﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺭﻣﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺻـﻭﻯ ) ‪Void‬‬
‫‪ (Ratio, e‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺻﻌـﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ‪ = Dr‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ) ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ – ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ( ÷ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ – ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪( d min – d max) d / ( d min – d) d max = Dr‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ‬
‫‪ : Dr‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ : d max‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ : d min‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪10 – 15‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺨﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً‪Very Loose‬‬
‫‪15 – 35‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺨﻠﺔ‪Loose‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻚ ‪Medium‬‬
‫‪35 – 65‬‬
‫‪Compact‬‬
‫‪65 – 85‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﻮﻛﺔ ‪Compact‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﻮﻛﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ‪Very‬‬
‫‪85 – 100‬‬
‫‪Compact‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٤‬ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻲ ‪ = RC‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪ /‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٤‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻲ‬

‫‪( ASTM D – 4253 (Minimum Index Density‬‬
‫‪(Maximum Index Density) ٤٢٥٤ – ASTM D‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ Mold‬ﺣﺟﻣﻪ ‪٢٨٣٠‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ ‪١٤٢٠٠‬ﺳﻡ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪ Surcharge Base Plate‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ) ‪ ٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ ‪٣٧٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ ‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ‪.( ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺓ ‪. Vibrating Table‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١ – ٣‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ‪d max  ، Maximum Index Density‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺔ ) ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ) ﻛﺠﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )ﺳﻢ‪) ٣‬‬
‫)‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻢ)‬
‫‪14200‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬
‫‪14200‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬
‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬
‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬
‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪4.75‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺛﻡ ﺍﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻣﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻳﻧﺎ ً ﻭﻳﺳﺎﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺯ ﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﻳﺭﺗﺯ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ‪٠٫٣٣‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﻳﺭﺗﺯ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ‪ ٠٫٤٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻐّﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﻳﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﻳﺭﺗﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺛﻡ ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ d Max .٨‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪.‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ (٪٢‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ٣d min‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ‪Minimum Index Density‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬

‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﻢ‪) ٣‬‬ ‫) ﻛﺠﻢ )‬ ‫ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺔ ) ﻣﻠﻢ )‬
‫ﻛﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫‪14200‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪14200‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪2830‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪4.75‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺛﻡ ﺍﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ d min‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻛـﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ (٪١‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪( d min – d max) d / ( d min – d) d max = Dr‬‬
‫‪ : Dr‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : d max‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : d min‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪Specific Gravity of Soils ,Gs‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻳﺯ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪2.65 – 2.68‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2.65 – 2.68‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2.62 – 2.68‬‬ ‫ﻁﻤﻴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2.58 – 2.65‬‬ ‫ﻁﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪2.68 – 2.75‬‬ ‫ﻁﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ‪ ٢٫٦٧‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﻭ ‪ ٢٫٧٠‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٥‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ASTM – 854‬‬
‫‪AASHTO T -100‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺛﺭﻣﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻣﺎء ﻣﻘﻁﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪ Wa‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺯﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٠ -١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺑﺑﻁء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﻁ ‪ Vacuum‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺻﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪. ٢‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺃﺿﻑ ﻣﺎ ًء ﻣﻘﻁﺭﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪. Wb‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺗﺑﺧﻳﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻟﻳﺟﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ‪. Wo‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪{ (Gs @ Tx = W o { W o + ( W a – W b‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : TX‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Wo‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Wa‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : W b‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ = ( ٢٠‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ( × ) ‪ ) / water. ( water‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ( ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫(‬
‫‪ ٩ – ٥‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ ‪California Bearing Ratio , CBR‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻏﺭﺯ ﻟﻺﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ‬‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻣـﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ( ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪٥٬٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪١‬ﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺃﻭ ‪٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪٢‬ﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻭﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺷﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻟﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﺭﺍ ً ﻋﻥ ﺗﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ASTM – 854‬‬
‫‪AASHTO T -100‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺛﺭﻣﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻣﺎء ﻣﻘﻁﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪ Wa‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺯﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٠ -١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺑﺑﻁء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﻁ ‪ Vacuum‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺻﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪. ٢‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺃﺿﻑ ﻣﺎ ًء ﻣﻘﻁﺭﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪. Wb‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺗﺑﺧﻳﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻟﻳﺟﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ‪. Wo‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪{ (Gs @ Tx = W o { W o + ( W a – W b‬‬
‫‪ : TX‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Wo‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Wa‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : W b‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪/ water‬ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ = ( ٢٠‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ( × ) ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ( ‪ ). ( water‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪( ٢٠‬‬
‫‪ ٩ – ٥‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ ‪California Bearing Ratio , CBR‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻏﺭﺯ ﻟﻺﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻣـﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ( ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪٥٬٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪١‬ﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺃﻭ ‪٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪٢‬ﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻭﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺷﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻟﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﺭﺍ ً ﻋﻥ ﺗﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ ‪USC‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﺘﻮ ‪AASHTO‬‬ ‫‪CBR‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻴﺔ ‪A5 ,A6,A7 OH,CH,MH,OL‬‬ ‫‪0-3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻴﺔ ‪A4 , A5 OH,CH,MH,OL‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪3–7‬‬
‫‪,A6,A7‬‬
‫‪A2 , A4‬‬
‫‪OH,CH,MH,OL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪7 – 20‬‬
‫‪,A6,A7‬‬
‫‪GM‬‬
‫‪A1b ,‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪,GC,SW‬‬ ‫‪20-‬‬
‫‪A2 – 5,‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪,SM‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬
‫‪A3,A2-6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪,SP,GP‬‬
‫‪A1a,A‬‬
‫‪GW ,GM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪2-4,A3‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٦‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ) ‪( CBR‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫( ﻣﻠﻢ )‬ ‫(ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ )‬
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪6.9‬‬
‫‪5.00‬‬ ‫‪10.3‬‬
‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫‪13.00‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪16.00‬‬
‫‪12.7‬‬ ‫‪18.00‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٧‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ) ‪( CBR‬‬
‫‪ASTM D – 1883 - 87‬‬
‫‪AASHTO T – 193- 81‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟـ ‪ CBR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ‪ Mold‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪ Collar‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪. Base Plate‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ‪ ، Rammer‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻭﺃﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬﺯ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ،(٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ‪ Mold‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺷﺭﺣﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٤٫٥‬ﻛﺟﻡ ) ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ، ( Overburden Pressure‬ﺛﻡ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ ﺃﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ‪ Dial Gauge‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺗﻪ‬
‫‪٠٫٠١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺻﻔّﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺳﺟﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺧـﺫ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪٢٤ ، ١٢ ، ٨ ، ٤ ، ٢ ، ١ ، ٠‬‬
‫‪ ٩٦ ، ٧٢ ، ٤٨ ، ٣٦ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ٤٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺛﺑﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻔﻑ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻧﺎ ً ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪٤٫٥‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻔﺭّ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺯﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﺙ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻠﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺍﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ) ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ )ﻣﻠﻡ( ﺛﻡ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ‪ ٠٫٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻭﺭﻧﻳﺎ )‪ = ( CBR‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ × ‪. (٪) ١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻧـﺩ ﺍﺧﺗـﺭﺍﻕ ‪٥٫٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٧‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﺍﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ )‪ (٪‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ) ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ( ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻏﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ـ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬

‫‪٦‬ـ‪١‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪Coarse Aggregate AASHTO( T27-78 Sieve Analysis Of Fine And‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٪٠٫١‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﻓﺭﻥ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪٪٩٥ ( ٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗـﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ‪ -‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪٪ ٨٥ ( ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺎ ً ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﺟﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺩﻱ ﻹﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪١‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ – ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪١ً ١/٢ ١ً ٣ً/٤ ١ً/٢ ٣ً/٨ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ)ﺟﻡ( ‪١٥٠٠٠ ١٠٠٠٠ ٥٠٠٠ ٢٠٠٠ ١٠٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪٣ً ١/٢ ٣ً ٢ً ١/٢ ً ٢ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ)ﺟﻡ( ‪١٠٠٫٠٠٠ ٦٠٫٠٠٠ ٣٥٫٠٠٠ ٢٠٫٠٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻫـ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺍﺕ ﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﺷﺗﻭ ‪ T-11-78‬ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧـﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻛﺭﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺧﻳﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳـﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪. ٪٠٫٣‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺑﻘﺳﻣﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ٍّ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻠﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻘﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺟﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻭﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،١٠٠‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻣﻠﻡ = ‪ ٦٠٠ ١٫٢ ٢٫٤ ٤٫٧٦ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ‪١٥٠ ٣٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ=‬
‫ﺻﻔﺭ ‪٩٣ ٧٦ ٤١ ٢٢ ١٢ ٢‬‬
‫‪ .:‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺎﺕ = ‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ‪. ٢٫٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﺗﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﻔﻳﺩ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ـ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪Absorption & Aggregate Specific Gravity‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪C – 128 & ASTM C – 127‬‬
‫‪٨٥ - T & AASHTO T – 84‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪ Pycnometer‬ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻠﺩﻙ ‪ Tamper‬ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ٣٤٥‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻭﻋﺎء ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬﺯ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺟﻔﻔﻪ ﺑﻔﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻛﻪ ﻟﻳﺑﺭﺩ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻏﻣﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٩‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻣﺭﺭ ﻫﻭﺍ ًء ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻣـﻸ ﺟﺯءﺍ ً ﻣـﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣـﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺳﻁﺣـﻪ ‪ (Saturated Surface – Dry (SSD‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪٩٠‬ﻭﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺟﻔﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﻠﻭء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪(Bulk Specific Gravity = A / ( B + 500-C‬‬
‫‪ = A‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ = B‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ = C‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻱ‬
‫‪( Gravity = A / ( B + A –C Apparent Specific‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫( ‪[ A) / A – ) = [ ( 500٪X 100 Absorption‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺟﻬﺯ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٥‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗـﻡ )‪، (٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺟﻔﻔﻪ ﺑﻔﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻛﻪ ﻟﻳﺑﺭﺩ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻏﻣﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟــﻭﺯﻥ‬

‫)ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ )ﻣﻠﻡ‬ ‫))ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫‪12.5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫‪112‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬
‫‪125‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬
‫‪150‬‬ ‫‪125‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺃﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﻑ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺑﺭﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪. (Bulk Specific Gravity = A / ( B -C‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ‬
‫= ‪B / ( B –C ) SSD‬‬
‫‪ = A‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ = B‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ = C‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪A / ( A – C = Apparent Specific Gravity‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫( ‪)= ( B – A ) / A x 100٪Absorption‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻱ ‪Los Angelos Abrasion‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻱ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٧٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺟﻠﻭﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ASTM C – 131‬‬
‫‪AASHTO T – 96‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺱ ﺃﻧﺟﻠﻭﺱ ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٧١١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ٥٠٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻑ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﺑﺭﻭﺯ ‪ ٨٩‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻛﺎﺯ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﻣ ّﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻣﻳﻼﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪. ١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٤٦٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٣٩٠‬ﺟﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤٤٥‬ﺟﻡ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪5000‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪4584‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
‫‪3330‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻭﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻞ‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪1250 ± 25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪37.5‬‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪1250 ± 25‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪2500 ± 10 1250 ± 10 12.5‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪2500 ± 10 1250 ± 10‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫‪12.5‬‬
‫ـ‬ ‫‪2500 ± 10‬‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬
‫ـ‬ ‫‪2500 ± 10‬‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬
‫‪5000 ± 10‬‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪2.36‬‬ ‫‪4.75‬‬
‫‪5000 ± 10 5000 ± 10 5000 ± 10 5000 ± 10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤــﻮﻉ‬
‫) ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ( ٩‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑـﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٥‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ)‪. (Wo‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺟﻠﻭﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﻧﺧﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ، ١٢‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٥‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ ) ‪. ( Wf‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻱ )‪Wo x 100 / ( Wo – Wf) = (٪‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : Wo‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Wf‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﺧﻠﻪ ﻭﻏﺳﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٥‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺱ ﺃﻧﺟﻠﻭﺱ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬

‫‪٦‬ـ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪Soundness Of Aggregate‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺩﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﻳﺳﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻹﻋﻁﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ASTM C – 88‬‬
‫‪AASHTO T – 104‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪. ١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﻧﺧﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺩﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﻳﺳﻳﻭﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻻﺑﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺟﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ٠٫٣٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪٠٫١‬ﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻻ ﺑﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٤‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻢ‬
‫‪300 ± 5‬‬ ‫‪4.75 – 9.5‬‬
‫‪1000 ± 10‬‬ ‫‪9.5 – 19‬‬
‫‪1500 ± 50‬‬ ‫‪19 – 37.5‬‬
‫‪5000 ± 300‬‬ ‫‪37.5 – 63‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ‬
‫‪7000 ± 1000‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﺗﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺩﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﻳﺳﻳﻭﻡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻭﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ١٢٫٧‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﻳﻧـﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺑﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺯﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﻏﺳﻠﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﻳﻭﻡ ‪Barium‬‬
‫‪ Chloride‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻝ ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻧﺧﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺑﻖ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﺭﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﺳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻘﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ، ٪٠٫١‬ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ٠٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻫﻭ ﺻﻔﺭ ‪. ٪‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻌﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪. (ASTM C117 , AASHTO T 11) :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ٧٥)(٢٠٠‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻠﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻠﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ، ١٦‬ﻭﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻭﻋﺎء ﺫﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﻛﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺫﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫١‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ – ﻓﺭﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﻛﺎﻟﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻭﺗﺣﻭﻱ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١١ً/٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٣ً/٤‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٣ً/٨‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫‪(37.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ)‬ ‫‪(19‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‬ ‫‪(2.36‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ‪(4.75‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ‪(9.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪5.00‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬ ‫‪0.10‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫)‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪. ٪٠٫٢‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺎء ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻐﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺻﺏ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻠﻳﻥ ﺑﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ْ ٥±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ – ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ = ٢٠٠‬ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ × ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪٠٫٠٧٥‬ﻣﻡ )ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ (٢٠٠‬ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪. ٪٠٫٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪( ASTM C142 , AASHTO T 112 ) :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺗﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫١‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻧﺗﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻑ(‬‫ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺑﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ )‪ْ ٩ ±٢٣٠‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳـﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺷﺗﻭ‬
‫)‪ (T 11‬ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪٧٥‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺷﺗﻭ )‪(T 11‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪١٫١٨‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٥‬ﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪٤٫٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪٩٫٥ ،‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫‪١٩‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪٣٧٫٥ ،‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬

‫)ﻛﺠﻢ )‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪4.75‬ـ ‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ـ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪) ٣ً/٨‬‬
‫‪9.5‬ـ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ‪ ٣ً/٨‬ـ ‪٣ً/٤‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪19‬ـ ‪٣٧٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٣ً/٤‬ـ‪١ً ١/٢‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪) ١ً ١/٢ ) ٣٧٫٥‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟـﻭﺩ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻳﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻋـﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗـﻡ )‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩﻳﻥ ‪. ٤ ، ٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻭﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋـﺔ ‪٤ ±‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻑ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻝ ﻛﻛﺗﻝ ﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺘﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻞ‬
‫‪0.850‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٢٠‬‬
‫‪١٫١٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﻗﻢ‪) ١٦‬‬
‫‪4.75‬ـ ‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2.36‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٨‬‬
‫‪)٣ً/٨‬‬
‫‪2.36‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٨‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬ـ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ‪ ٣ً/٨‬ـ ‪) ٣ً/٤‬‬
‫‪4.75‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٤‬‬ ‫‪19‬ـ ‪٣٧٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ً‪ (4/3‬ـ ‪) ١ً ١/٢‬‬
‫‪4.75‬ﻣﻠﻢ ) ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪) ١ً ١/٢ ) ٣٧٫٥‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ‪ * :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﺑﻌﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺩﺣﺭﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺻﺑﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﻅﺎﻓﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺻﻠﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٪٠٫٠٢‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ–ﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻁ= ـــــــــــ ‪× 100‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻁ = ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻡ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺳﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻼً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪ ٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ )‪ (١-٤‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ ﺃﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧ – ٦‬ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪( ASTM D2419 - AASHTO T 176 ) :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪١٫٢٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٧‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺗﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻛﻝ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻘﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﻭﻋﺎء ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ١‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺔ ﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻘﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﻁ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ ٣/١٦‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺛﻘﻝ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ‪ ١٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺣﻠﺯﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺛﻘﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻛﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ )‪٨٥‬ﺳﻡ‪. (٣‬‬
‫ﺭ ‪ -‬ﻗﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ـ ‪٤٥٤‬ﺟﻡ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﺳﻳﻭﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻣﻳﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ـ ‪ ٢٠٥٠‬ﺟﻡ )‪١٦٤٠‬ﺳﻡ‪ (٣‬ﺟﻠﻳﺳﺭﻳﻥ )‪. (U.S.P‬‬
‫ﺟـ ـ ‪ ٤٧‬ﺟﻡ )‪٤٥‬ﺳﻡ‪ (٣‬ﻓﻭﺭﻣﺎﻟﺩﻫﺎﻳﺩ )‪ ٪ ٤٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﻳﺫﺍﺏ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻟﺳﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺟـﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ ﻳﺑﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺭﺷﺢ ﺑﻭﺭﻗـﺔ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺳﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭﻣﺎﻟﺩﻫﺎﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﻳﺧﻠﻁ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ﺛﻡ ﻳﺧﻔﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻘﻁﺭﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺷﺭﺏ ﺟﻳﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺧﻔﻑ ‪٨٥‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ١‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﺗﻣﻸ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪٤٫٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪٨٥‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ، ٤‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻔﺭﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﻳﻔﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﻣﻸ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻣﻖ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳﻔﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﻠﺑـﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪١١٠‬ﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﺑﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺭﺝ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺍﺭ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ )‪٢٠‬ﺳﻡ( ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺫﻫﺎﺑﺎ ً ﻭﺇﻳﺎﺑﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺝ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺧﺎء ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ – ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻁﻑ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺗﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻭء ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻠﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻘﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺭﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ – ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺯﺍﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻠﻁﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻠﻑ ﺑﺧﻔﺔ ﻭﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﺯﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﺯﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫‪× 100‬‬ ‫ـــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ=‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٦‬ـ‪ ٨‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ‬
‫‪( ASTM C 29) ، ( Unit Weight of Aggregates ( AASHTO T 19-76‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺫﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٪٠٫٣‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺩﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ‪ ٥ /٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻪ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٥/٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻭﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻠﺑﺎ ً ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻳﻳﻝ ‪ ١/٢‬ﻗﺩﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻗﺩﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٢‬ﺫﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ١ ١/٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ) ﻣﻢ )‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫(ﻣﺘﺮ‪١٠× (٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻢ )‬
‫)ﻣﻢ )‬ ‫( ﻣﻢ )‬ ‫‪٤-‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪154± 2.5 152± 2.5‬‬ ‫‪28.317‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪292± 2.5 203± 2.5‬‬ ‫‪94.39‬‬
‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪279± 2.5 254± 2.5 141.585‬‬
‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪284± 2.5 356± 2.5‬‬ ‫‪283.17‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٠‬ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻳﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ ‪ /‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﻁﻞ ‪ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪999.01‬‬ ‫‪62.366‬‬ ‫‪15.6‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬
‫‪998.54‬‬ ‫‪62.336‬‬ ‫‪18.3‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬
‫‪997.97‬‬ ‫‪62.3001‬‬ ‫‪21.1‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬
‫‪997.54‬‬ ‫‪62.274‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪73.4‬‬
‫‪997.32‬‬ ‫‪62.261‬‬ ‫‪23.9‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬
‫‪996.59‬‬ ‫‪62.216‬‬ ‫‪26.7‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬
‫‪995.83‬‬ ‫‪62.166‬‬ ‫‪29.4‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻـﻭﻝ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﺷﺗـﻭ ) ‪ ( AASHTO T-248‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ﻭﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﺑﻠﻭﺡ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪. ٪٠٫١ ±‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟـﻣﺎء ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻘﺳﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻣﻝء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻁـﺭﻳﻘـﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣــﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١ ١/٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻟﺛﻠﺛﻪ ﻭﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﺩﻙ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻙ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺯﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺛﻠﺙ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺩﻙ ‪٢٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﺩﻙ‬
‫‪٢٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺧﺗﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺎ ً ﻷﻥ ﻳﺧﺗﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺿﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﺗﻁﺑﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١ ١/٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﺙ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﻣﻙ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ ﻛﺿﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﻣﻙ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺿﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺗﻭء ﻟﻠﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ‪ -‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻭﻑ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺭﻓﺔ " ‪ "Scoop‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺭﻍ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ ﻋـﻥ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ – ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻳﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬ـ ﻓﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬

‫‪٧‬ـ‪ ١‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ـ‪١‬ـ‪ ١‬ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ‪Materials Sampling Bituminous‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳـﺔ ‪( AASHTO T-40 ) :‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻑ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﻻﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﻟﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺑﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻟﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﻷﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﻟﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻑ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻭﺍﺣـﺩ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺣﻭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ـ‪ ١‬ـ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﻖ ﻛﻠﻳﻔﻼﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﻖ ﻛﻠﻳﻔﻼﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺗﺭﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺎﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ْ‪ 79‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺻﻑ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻸ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺛﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻲء ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺑﺕ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺭﺭ ﻟﻬﺏ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻖ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻬﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻠﻬﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻖ ﻛﻠﻳﻔﻼﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻭﻟﻬﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺧﺎﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪. (٦‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٦‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻠﻳﻔﻼﻧﺩ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ـ ‪١‬ـ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪Materials Penetration Of Bituminous‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻑ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁـﺔ ﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﺭﺯ ﻭ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗـﻡ )‪ (٧‬ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﺭﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺍً ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻳﻌﻁﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺗﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ْ‪ ٩٠‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻـﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛـﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺗﻠﺗﻪ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣـﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻹﺑـﺭﺓ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺑـﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ‪ ٠٫٠٥ ±٤٧٫٥‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻭﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻺﺑﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ‪٠٫١ ± ٥٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻥ ‪ ٠٫٠٥ ± ٥٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ ‪ ٠٫٠٥ ± ١٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺣﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪١٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ‪٢٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٩‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ( ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ )‪ (٧‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﻣﻁﺑّﻊ ) ﻣﻐﻁﺱ ( ﻭﺻﻠﺏ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺃ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ْ‪٤٤٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎ ٍﻭ ﻟﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁـﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣـﻡ ) ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻭﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٫٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٫٠٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠٣٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٠٤٠‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻗﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٨٫٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٫٧‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﺑﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺣﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣـﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺑـﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣـﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٠٫٠١٢٧‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠٠٠٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺟﻠﻳﺦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﺎ ً ﻧﺎﻗﺻﺎ ً ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪٠٫١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫١٦‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠٠٥٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٠٠٦٣‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﺩﺍًّ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻳﺵ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻕ ـ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (B46.1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﻳﻳﺱ _ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﻲ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٠٫٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻣﻳﺗﺭ ) ‪ ٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻁـﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً )‪ ١٫٥٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٫٧٧‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺑـﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺑـﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛـﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻋـﻥ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ‪ ٠٫٠٥ ± ٣٫٢‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠٠٢ ± ٠٫١٢٦‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻭﺑﻁﻭﻝ ‪ ٣٨‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫)‪ ١٫٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ‪ ٠٫٠٥ ± ٢٫٥٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ) ﻳﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺛﻘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬
‫ﻳﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻋـﺎء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺎﺕ ) ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﻳﺗﺭ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ‪٥٥‬ﻣﻡ )‪٢٫١٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻡ )‪ ١٫٣٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣـﺎﺋﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪٠٫١‬ﻡ‪ ٠٫٢ ) ٥‬ﻑ‪ ( ٥‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﺗﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻘﺏ ﺑـ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﻑ ﻗﻭﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١-٥‬ﻟﻼﺧﺗـﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٥ ٢٥‬ﻡ ) ‪٥ ٧٧‬ﻑ ( ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ) ‪ ( ASTM‬ﺳﺎﻳﺑﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪١٧‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫)‪١٧‬ﻑ( ﺫﻭ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ١٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥ ٢٧‬ﻡ ) ‪ ٦٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥ ٨٠‬ﻑ( ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫‪١٥±١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢-٥‬ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺭ ‪٥‬ﻡ ) ‪٥ ٣٢‬ﻑ ( ﻭ ‪٥ ٤‬ﻡ )‪٥ ٣٩٫٢‬ﻑ( ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪٥ ٦٣‬ﻡ ) ﺃﻭ ‪٥٦٣‬ﻑ ( ﺫﻭ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ )‪٥ ٨-‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥ ٣٢ +‬ﻑ ( ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ١٥ ± ١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣-٥‬ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٥ ٤٦٫١‬ﻡ )‪٥ ١١٥‬ﻑ( ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪٥ ٦٤‬ﻡ ) ﺃﻭ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬ﻑ ( ﺫﻭ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥٥٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ٧٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥ ١٣١‬ﻑ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٥ ±١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳـﻁﺔ ) ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻭﻣـﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘـﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻣﺣـﻔـﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺩﺍﺧـﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔـﺔ ) ‪.( ( ASTM E 77‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘـﻝ ﺍﻟﺧـﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋــﺎء ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧـﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌـﺩﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪٩٠‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ( "٣٫٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪٥٥‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ( "٢٫١٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗـﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬـﺎﺯ ﺁﺧـﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺯﻧﺑﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺭﺟـﺎ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗـﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﺣـﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٠٫١ ±‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻟﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻛﻝ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ١١‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺯﻣﻥ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪±‬‬
‫‪٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺃﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺍً ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٠٫١ ±‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ْ‪١٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ْ‪ ٥٦‬ﻡ )‪ ْ ١٠٠‬ﻑ ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ ) ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ (‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﺎﻗﻳﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺑـ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺏ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﻋـﺎء ﻭﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﻳﺑﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳـﺩ ﻋـﻥ ْ‪ ٢٩٫٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ْ ٨٥‬ﻑ ( ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ْ‪ ٢١‬ﻡ‬
‫)ْ‪ ٧٠‬ﻑ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١ ١/٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ( ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ‪١٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ )‪ ٦‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺎﺕ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺳﺎﻋـﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳـﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١ ١/٢‬ﺳﺎﻋـﺔ ) ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣـﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ) ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺎﺕ ( ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ (‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١ ١/٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ) ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ( ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺳـﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻓـﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ‪ ١٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ) ‪ ٦‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺎﺕ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳـﺩ ﻋـﻥ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ) ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺎﺕ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻟﻺﺑﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ‬ ‫ٌ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺍً‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻖ ﻣﻣﻠﻭء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻖ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺛﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻌﻛﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ )ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ‪ ، ( ٤‬ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻁﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻭﺣﻅﺕ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻋﺎء ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻏﺭﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻋـﺎء ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻡ )‪ ٣/٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻌـﺩ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻡ )‪ ٣/٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻏﺭﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺫﻳﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ، ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻻ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻓﺭ‬ ‫ﺯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛـﺭ‬ ‫‪249‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻗ‬
‫ﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺳﺟﺎﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ – ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻭﻛﺎ ً ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻔﺗﺎ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ‬

‫)‪٥٧٧‬ﻑ( ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺭﺯ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ‬
‫‪3٪‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﻬﻡ‬ ‫)‪٥٧٧‬ﻑ( ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺭﺯ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻓﺄﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪15٪‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﻬﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫*‬ ‫‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ) ‪٥٧٧‬ﻑ )‬
‫* ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻟﻠﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻳـﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻏﺭﺯ ‪٠٢٤٫٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﺛـﺭ ﺻﻼﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺛـﺭ ﻟﻳـﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬ـ‪١‬ـ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ‪( Kinematic Viscosity of Asfalt‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪( AASHTO T 201 ) :‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ )ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ( ﻭﺯﻳﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ( ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ‬
‫)ْ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻑ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛـﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷـﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻋـﻧﺩ ْ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( )ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ‪ ( ١‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ‪. (( CST‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ )‪ (١‬ﺗﺻﻠﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋـﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳـﻖ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻑ( ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ )‪. (CST‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺿﺭﺏ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪-١‬ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﺩﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗــﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻲ ﻫﻲ ‪ ١‬ﺳﻡ ‪/ ٢‬ﺙ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ )‪١‬ﺳﺗﻭﻙ( ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣـﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠـﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻡ‪/٢‬ﺙ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺍً ﻫﻲ ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ) ‪ ١‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ = ‪ ٢-١٠‬ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫‪١‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﺍ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ً ﻟﺯﻭﺟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔـﺭﻧﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗـﺭﻱ ﻫﻲ ‪١‬ﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ‪.‬ﺙ ) ‪ ١‬ﺩﺍﻳﻥ ﺙ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺑـﻭﻳﺯ ) ‪ ( Poise‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟـﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﺙ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﻭﻳﺯ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ً ﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺑﻭﻳﺯ‬
‫) ‪ ١‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺑﻭﻳﺯ = ‪ ٢– ١٠‬ﺑﻭﻳﺯ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ) ‪(VISCOMETERS‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻳﻠﻳﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺩﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ) ﻛﺎﻧﻭﻥ – ﻓﻳﻧﺳﻙ ( ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ) ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ) ﻻﻧﺗﺯ – ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ ( ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻲ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ) ‪: ( THERMOMETERS‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ‪ ٥٨٫٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥٦١٫٤‬ﻡ )‪ ١٣٧٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥١٤٢٫٥‬ﻑ( ﻭ ‪ ١٣٣٫٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪٥١٣٦٫٤‬ﻡ )‪ ٥٢٧٢٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥٢٧٧٫٥‬ﻑ( ﻭﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪٥٤٧‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪٥١١٠‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪٥٤٧‬ﻑ ﻭ ‪٥١١٠‬ﻑ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﺗﺯﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ) ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ( ‪ْ ٤٧‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪ْ ١١٠‬ﻡ ) ‪٤٧‬ﻑ ﻭ‪١١٠‬ﻑ( ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ) ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ( ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻗﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻕ ﻭﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺑﻘﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻏﻣﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻼﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻏﻣﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪( ٨‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ )ﻛﺎﻧﻭﻥ – ﻓﻳﻧﺳﻙ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٩‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ) ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ( ١٠‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ) ﻻﻧﺗﺯ – ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ( ١١‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻲ‬

‫‪-٣‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ )‪ (VISCOMETER‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺃﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ( ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻛﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺟﺯءﺍً ﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛـﻭﻥ ﻛﻔـﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗـﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻘـﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻘـﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣـﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ‪ ٠٫٠٣ْ ±‬ﻡ )‪ ٠٫٠٥ْ ±‬ﻑ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺳﺎﺋﻼ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻑ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻭﺟـﺩ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﺑـﻳﺽ )‪ (USP‬ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ْ‪٢١٥‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ٤٢٠‬ﻑ ( ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻹﺟـﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭ ﻋﻧـﺩ ْ‪١٣٥‬ﻡ ) ْ‪ ٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﻖ ﻛﻠﻳﻔﻭﻻﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ )‪.(AASHTO T48‬‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗـﻭﻗﻳﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫‪٠٫١‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٪٠٫٠٥‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺗـﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍً ) ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺷﻳﻭﻋﺎ ً ( ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٥‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١ – ١ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ( ﻭﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١ – ١ – ١ – ٥‬ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ١ – ١– ٥‬ﻳﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء ﻣﺣﺑﻭﺱ ﺑـﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳـﻧﺔ ﻟﺯﺟﺔ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺻﻌﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺄﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﻣـﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ٣ْ±٦٣‬ﻡ ) ‪٥ْ ± ١٤٥‬‬
‫ﻑ ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٣ – ١ – ١ – ٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤ – ١ – ١ – ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٨٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪٦٠‬ﻡ‬
‫)ْ‪١٤٠‬ﻑ( ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٣ْ ±٦٣‬ﻡ ) ‪ ٥ْ ± ١٤٥‬ﻑ ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ١ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ) ‪. ( ASPHALT CEMENT‬‬

‫‪ ١ – ٢ – ١ – ٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ٢ – ١ – ٥‬ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٫٥ْ ± ١٣٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ١٠ْ ±٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ )‪ (٢-٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (٨-٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٠٫٠٣ْ ±‬ﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠٥ْ ±‬ﻑ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ) ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻣﻸ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻼﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺷﻁﻔﻪ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻼﻣﺗﺯﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﻘﺑﻪ ﺷﻁﻑ ﺑﻣﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء ﺑﻁﻲء ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺯﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺛﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺫﻳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺑﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺣﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻣﻳﻙ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺍﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺷﻁﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻳﺗﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺍﺳﺏ ﻭﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﺃﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺑﻬﻭﺍء ﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ) ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ( = ﻡ ‪ .‬ﺯ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻡ = ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ) ‪ ) ( VISCOMETER‬ﺳﻧﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ‪ /‬ﺙ (‬
‫ﺯ = ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ) ﺙ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺑﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ )ْ‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻑ ( ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٧٥٫٦‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺗﻳﻥ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ) ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺗﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ )ﺃ ) )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ )ﺃ)‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻔﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫‪1.8‬‬ ‫‪0.64‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪٥١٣٥‬ﻡ )‪٥٢٧٥‬ﻑ )‬
‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٦٠‬ﻡ‬
‫) ‪٥١٤٠‬ﻑ )‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ‬
‫‪1.5‬‬ ‫‪0.53‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪2.0‬‬ ‫‪0.71‬‬
‫ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫‪8.9‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪8.8‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪٥١٣٥‬ﻡ )‪٥٢٧٥‬ﻑ )‬
‫ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٦٠‬ﻡ‬
‫) ‪٥١٤٠‬ﻑ )‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ‬
‫‪3.0‬‬ ‫‪1.06‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪9.00‬‬ ‫‪3.11‬‬
‫ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ )ﺏ )‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪3.6‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ )ﺏ )‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻫـﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺣـﺩ )‪ (٪S١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (٪D2S‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺷﺗﻭ )‪. (R2‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ )‪ (١٢‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌــﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ _‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺟـﺩﻭﻝ )‪ _ (٣‬ﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻻ ﻳﻘـﻝ ﻋـﻥ ‪٢٠٠‬ﺙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧـﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪٥٣٧٫٨‬ﻡ ) ‪٥١٠٠‬ﻑ ( ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻷﻗـﺭﺏ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ )ﺏ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠــﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺏ=ﺯ‪/‬ﻥ‬
‫ﺯ = ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳـﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ) ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻥ = ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ) ﺛﺎﻧﻳــﺔ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﻧﺗﺯ – ﺯﻳﺗﻔﻭﺱ )‪ (BS-IP-RF‬ﺫﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺭﻑ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫) ‪. (U‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ )ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﻭﻥ – ﻓﻳﻧﺳﻙ( ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺣﺟﻣﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻠﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻔﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ )ﺏ( = ﺏ ﻡ ) ‪ + ١‬ﻡ ) ﻫـ ﺡ – ﻫـ ﻝ (( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺏ ﻡ = ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻠﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ = ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻡ = ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻝ = ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )ﺡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺗــﺎﻟﻳـﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪4‬ﺡ ) ﺙ ﻝ – ﺙ ﺡ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ = ‪ ٤‬ﺃ ﺡ ‪ /‬ﻁ ﻕ ‪٢‬‬
‫ــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫ﻑ=‬
‫ﻁ ﻕ‪ ٢‬ﻑ ﺙ ﺡ ) ﻫـﺢ – ﻫـ‬
‫ﻝ)‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺡ = ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻧﺔ ) ﺳﻡ‪( ٣‬‬
‫ﻕ = ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻑ = ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻋﻠـﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛـﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ = ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟــﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ = ﺍﻟﻛﺛـﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪. ٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ) ﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻝ ( = ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫)ﺏ( ﻟﻠﻔﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ )ﻉ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠـﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻉ‪× ٢‬‬
‫ﺙ‪١‬‬
‫ــــــــ‬ ‫ﺙ‪= ٢‬‬
‫ﻉ‪١‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ = ٢‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ = ١‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻉ‪ = ٢‬ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻉ‪ = ١‬ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ "ﻉ" ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪. ٪٠٫٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ) ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ )‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳــﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟـﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٥٠‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٣٧٫٨‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔــﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳـﺔ‬
‫‪٥٩٩‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪( 5122‬ﻑ )‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫‪(5210‬‬ ‫‪(5100‬ﻑ )‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻑ)‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪280‬‬ ‫‪600‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪2000‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪8000‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٨٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪11000‬‬ ‫‪27000‬‬ ‫ﺩ ‪٣٠٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺟــﺩﻭﻝ )‪ (١٣‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟـﺔ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻲ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻳﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ "ﺏ" ﻟـﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻫـﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻪ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘـﺔ " ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻋﻔﺔ " ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻗﺏ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ًء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺩﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ) ﺏ ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺕ‪× ٢‬‬
‫ﺏ‪٢‬‬
‫ــــــ‬ ‫ﺏ‪= ١‬‬
‫ﺕ‪١‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ = ١‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ) ﺏ ( ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ = ١‬ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻲ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪٠٫١‬ﺙ‬
‫ﺏ‪ = ٢‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ) ﺏ ( ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ = ٢‬ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٧‬ـ‪١‬ـ‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ‪( Absolute Viscosity of Asphalt‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪(ASTM D 2171) (AASHTO T 202):‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ١٤٠‬ﻑ ( ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٠٣٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺑﻭﻳﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺷﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ ) ‪ ْ ١٤٠‬ﻑ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﻳﺯ ﻛﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﺿﺭﺏ ﺯﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻭﻧﻳﺔ )‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﺩﺓ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺷﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺛﺭﺕ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ )‪ (١‬ﺩﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻳﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺳﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ) ‪ (١‬ﺑﻭﻳﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﻭﺗﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻭﻧﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ١٣٧٫٥‬ﺇﻟـﻰ ْ‪ ١٤٢٫٥‬ﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ْ ٤٧‬ﻑ ﻭ‪ ْ ٤٧‬ﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔـﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗـﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻳـﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺭﻳﻁـﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺯﺩ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳـﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑـﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺩ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻗﻣﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻖ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻕ ﻭﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﺷﻭﻓﺎ ً ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻏﻣﺭﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻛﻠﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺑﻐﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛ ٍّﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺣـﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٠٫٠٣ْ ±‬ﻡ ) ‪±‬‬
‫ْ‪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﻑ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻳﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٠٫٥ ±‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪٦٫٣٥‬ﻣﻡ )‪١/٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺿـﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻘﻲ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺄﻗﺳﺎﻡ "‪ "١‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ً ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻛﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ "‪ "٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٪٠٫٠٥‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ "‪ "١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫٠٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺑﺔ – ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻣﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺎ ً ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺏ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻳﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻟﺿﻣـﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﻌـﺩﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘـﺻﻭﻯ‬
‫‪ ْ ١٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ‪ْ ١٨٠‬ﻑ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻗـﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻳﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻋـﺎء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺛﻡ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﺣـﺗﻰ ْ‪5ْ٥٫ ± ١٣٥‬ﻡ )ْ‪ ١٠ْ ±٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ﻭﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺣﺑﺱ ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔـﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺱ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ) ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ‪ ، (١٤ ، ١٣ ، ١٢‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻧـﻭﺩ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﺣﻔـﻅ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪±‬‬
‫ْ‪ ٠٫٠٣‬ﻡ )‪ ٠٫٠٥ْ±‬ﻑ( ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪٥٫٥ْ ± ١٣٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ١٠ْ ± ٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﻣﻸ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٢ ±‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻝء )ﻫـ( ) ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ‪. ( ١٤ ، ١٣ ، ١٢‬‬
‫‪ ٤ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﻭﺿـﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٥٫٥ْ ± ١٣٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ١٠ْ ±٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢ ± ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ْ‪ ٦٠‬ﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪ ٠٫٥ ± ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧ – ١ – ٦‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﻣﺩﺓ ‪±٣٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻔﺗـﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨ – ١ – ٦‬ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺗﻣﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺯﻭﺟﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺯﻭﺟﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺫﺍ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﺻﻭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺷﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪ :‬ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻌـﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓـﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪٥٫٥ْ ±١٣٥‬ﻡ ) ‪ ٦٠ْ ±٢٧٥‬ﻑ ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﻅﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺷﻁﻔﻪ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﻣﺗﺯﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﻘﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟـﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺛﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺫﻳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻣﻳﻙ ﻹﺯﺍﻟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺍﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺷﻁﻑ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻳﺗﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺍﺳﺏ ﻭﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﺃﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺑﻬﻭﺍء ﺟﺎﻑ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٢‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻟﻛﻭﺑﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٣‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻟﻣﻌﻬﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٤‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻟﻛﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺞ‬

‫‪٧‬ـ‪١‬ـ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ‪Softening Point‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳـﺔ ) ‪. ( AASHTO T - 53‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻼﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﻭﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻠﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻔﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻔﻳﺩﻧﺎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﻳﺭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ‪ ،‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻧﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ْ ١٧٥‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺛﻳﻠﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻳﻛﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺗـﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻌـﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪١٥‬ـ ﺃ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ٩٫٥) ٣/٨‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻭﺗﺯﻥ ‪٠٫٠٥ ±٣٫٥‬ﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻟﺗﺣـﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ١٥‬ـ ﺏ (‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﻣـﺎﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺳﻌـﺔ ‪٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻠﻳﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﺑﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘـﺔ ) ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٥‬ـ ﺟـ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١ – ٥‬ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘـﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿـﻊ ﺃﻓﻘـﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﻔـﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘـﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔـﺎﻉ ‪"١‬‬
‫‪٢٥٫٤ ) " ٠٠٣ ±‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨ ±‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺳـﺎﻓـﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪١٢٫٧‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ( " ٠٫٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭ ‪١٩٫١‬ﻣﻡ ) ‪ ( " ٠٫٧٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺛـﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ – ٥‬ﻳﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﻣﺳﺗــﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪١٢٧ ) " ٠٥‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﻘﻳـﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣـﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺭﻳـﺔ ﻟﻠﻣـﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳـﺔ ﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﻟـﻪ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ – ‪٥١‬ﻡ ﺇﻟـﻰ ‪٥١٧٥‬ﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ‪٥٢٠‬ﻑ ﺇﻟـﻰ ‪٥٢٥٠‬ﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺣﻣـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳـﻭﺍﺋﻝ – ﺃﻳﺛﻠﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻳﻛﻭﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﻏﻠﻳـﺎﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٥١٩٣‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪٥٢٠٤‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺎﺋﻼً ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻛﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ْ ١٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻟﻬﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻣﻁﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺳﺭﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻛﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٥‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫ﻣــﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻـﺔ‬
‫‪23 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.91 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪19.8± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.78 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪19.1 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.75 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪15.9 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.63 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪4.4 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.17 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪2 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.08 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬
‫‪6.4 ± 0.4‬‬ ‫‪0.25± 0.02‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫‪3.6 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.14± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬
‫‪2.8 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.11 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪ – ١٥‬ﺃ ( ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣــﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻـﺔ‬
‫( ‪0.91‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ ( ‪23.1‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺏ)‬ ‫ﺏ)‬
‫( ‪0.78‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ ( ‪9.6‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺟـ)‬ ‫ﺟـ )‬
‫‪1.5 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.06 ± 02. 0‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪24.6 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.97 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪0.8 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.03± 0.02‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪3 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.12 ± 0.02‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬
‫‪1.5 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.06 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫‪4.8 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.19 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬
‫‪4.3 ± 0.3‬‬ ‫‪0.17 ± 0.01‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪ – ١٥‬ﺏ (‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪ – ١٥‬ﺟـ ( ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣـــﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻــﺔ‬
‫( ‪19.1‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ ﺃ‬ ‫( ‪0.75‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅﺔ ﺃ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫)‬ ‫)‬
‫‪23.9± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.94± 0.02 B‬‬
‫‪76.2 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪3 ± 0.02 C‬‬
‫‪5.6 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.22± 0.02 D‬‬
‫‪5.6 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.22 ± 0.02 E‬‬
‫‪66.5 ± 0.5‬‬ ‫‪2.62± 0.02 F‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ )ﺃ( ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ) ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ )‪-١٥‬‬
‫ﺃ( ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ – ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ) ‪١٢٫٧‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ )ﺏ(‪:‬ﻫـﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺷﻛﻝ )‪-١٥‬ﺃ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧـﺯﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ )ﺟـ( ‪ :‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ) ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ‪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﻣﻡ( ﻋﻥ ) ‪٩٫٦‬ﻣﻡ ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳـﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓـﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ) ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺛﻳﻠﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻳﻛﻭﻝ)‪ (Ethyleneglycol‬ﻭﺑﻌﻣﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ١٠٨ – ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٧ – ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ْ ١ ± ٤‬ﻡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ْ ٠٫٥ ± ٥‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻐﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺟﻠﺕ ﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺟﻠﺕ ﻟﻠﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ـ‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ‪7‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻷﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ) ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻥ‬
‫‪.‬ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ـ‪٢‬ـ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻷﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‪7‬‬
‫) ‪ :( AASHTO T 40-72‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔـﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳـﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳـﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺽ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻳﻣﺛﻠﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻰ ) ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ( ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣـﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫) ﻛﺟﻡ (‬ ‫ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪1450‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪950‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪950‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪650‬‬
‫‪12.50‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬
‫‪9.50‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬
‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬
‫‪2.38‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٤‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫‪ (SHOVEL /‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻐﻬــﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁــﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻐــﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻔﺻﻠﻬﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪SCOOP ) ،‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺯﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺑﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﺧـﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺎء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻷﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺯﺝ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ *‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ‪ (Stock Pile) ،‬ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺟﺯﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁـﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠــﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧـﻭﺫﺓ ﺃﺛﻧـﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ‬
‫( ﻳﻘـﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧـﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗـﻊ ﺗﻡ ﺭﺻﻔـﻪ ) ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ ، (١٤‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ‪PAVER‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻖ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻻﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﻲ ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺄﻗﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫‪7.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ) ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﻓﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ‪١٥٠‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٠٫٣‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺃﺧﺫ‬
‫ﻡ ﻁﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 150‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻡ ﻁﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪٠٫٦‬ﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 150‬ﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻛﻝ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓـﻠﺕ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ـ‪ ٢‬ـ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‪7‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ) ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻟﻪ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﻳﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ 3600‬ﻗﺻﻭﻯ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﺳﻣﻛﻪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪0.005‬‬
‫‪٠٫٠٥‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ْ ‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ‪3. 5‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻭﺗﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻕ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪١٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻋﺎء ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ‪ 100-200‬ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ . Trichloroethelene‬ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻳﻛﻠﻭﺭﻭ ﺃﻳﺛﻳﻠﻳﻥ ‪1.‬‬
‫‪ ((NH4) 2 Co3).‬ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻭﻧﻳﻭﻡ ‪2.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٦‬ﻭﻋﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻟﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻧﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻖ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬

‫)ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ )ﻣﻠﻡ‬ ‫))ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫‪37.500‬‬ ‫‪4.00‬‬
‫‪25.00‬‬ ‫‪3.00‬‬
‫‪19.00‬‬ ‫‪2.00‬‬
‫‪12.500‬‬ ‫‪1.50‬‬
‫‪9.500‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪0.500‬‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪٠٫١‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺎء ﺑﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻳﻛﻠﻭﺭﻭ ﺃﻳﺛﻳﻠﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺣﻠﻝ ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻭﻫﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺞ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻁء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺯﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺗﻪ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺎ ً ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٦٠٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ‪٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟـﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺵ ﺍﻟﻔـﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ ً‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻳﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ‪ْ ١٠٠‬ﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﺑﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺧﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ١١٠‬ﻡ ‪ْ ٥ ±‬ﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ )ﻭ‪ (٣‬ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻑٍ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻳﻛﻥ )ﺡ‪ (٢‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺗﻘﺔ ﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﻧﻪ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻭﺗﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ْ ٦٠٠ – ٥٠٠‬ﻡ ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺣﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﻳﺫﻭﺏ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳـﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻭﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ١٠٠‬ﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺑﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﺻﺔ )ﻭ‪ (٤‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺡ‪١‬‬
‫ﻭ‪) (٤‬ﺟﻡ( = ﻭﺯﻥ (‬
‫ـــــ‬
‫× ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺡ‪-١‬ﺡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪6.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺡ‪ = ١‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺡ‪ – ١‬ﺡ‪ ٢‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫﻩ ﺡ‪ = ٢‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫) ﻭ‪ – ١‬ﻭ‪ ) – ٢‬ﻭ‪ + ٣‬ﻭ‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ( ٪‬ﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫=)‬
‫ﻭ‪ – ١‬ﻭ‪٢‬‬
‫‪7.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭ‪ = ١‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭ‪ = ٢‬ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻭ‪ = ٣‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻭ‪ = ٤‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ) ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻌﺔ ـ‪٢‬ـ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‪7‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫) ‪ : (AASHTO T-166-78 , ASTM D 2726‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫)‪ (VMA‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ) ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺈﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ‪2.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ) ﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ( ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺛﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٢٥‬ﻡ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺎء ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻏﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺽ ‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﻧﺳﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻟﻐﻣﺭ ‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ً ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺭ ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺿﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ‪ ×١٫٥‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺍﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪1.‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻱ ﻣﺎء ﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥-٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٢٥‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺝ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻔﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ْ ٢‬ﻡ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪-١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ )ﺏ( ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺟﻔـﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﻓـﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ‬
‫‪).‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤ – ١٥‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ )ﺃ ‪ْ ١١٠‬ﻡ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺿﺭ ﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺑﻘﻳﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ْ ٢٥‬ﻡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥ – ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ )‪ (C‬ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ (B).‬ﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪1-‬‬
‫) ‪ = A/( C - B‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ = ‪A‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ = ‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ = ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ – ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ‬

‫=‪٪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫‪3.‬‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘـﺔ ﺍﻟﺛـﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ‪2.‬‬
‫)‪ ( Paraffin Coated Specimen‬ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ‪ (A) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗـﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٥٦٠‬ﻡ ‪٥٥ ±‬ﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﺍﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ (D) .‬ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء‬
‫‪٥١ ± ٢٥ (E) .‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪ ( Specific‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٥١ ± ٥٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ) ‪Gravity of Paraffin‬‬
‫‪ (F) .‬ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫= ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧـﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ) ﺟﻡ = ‪A‬‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ) ﺟﻡ = ‪D‬‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ) ﺟﻡ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ = ‪E‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻡ‪ 25 ± 51‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻓﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ = ‪F‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺧﺗـﻼﻓﺎ ً ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺍ ً ﻋﻥ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧـﻭﻋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛـﺎﻧﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣـﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ ) ASTM D 2726 ) ,‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ‬
‫) ‪R = Δt * KS * ( B - C‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫) ‪ ( Correction‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ = ‪R‬‬
‫ْﻡ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ‪ 25‬ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ = ‪Δt‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻌﻳﺑـﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ = ‪KS‬‬
‫‪(Avarage Coefficient of Cubical Thermal Expansion of Bituminous‬‬
‫‪Concrete‬‬
‫)‪= 6*10-5 ml/ml/ºc‬‬
‫‪6.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٢٥‬ﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺟـﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ـ‪٢‬ـ‪٤‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ‪7‬‬
‫) ‪ :( ASTM D 2041 - AASHTO T 209‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺳﻌﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﺗﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﻔﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﻟﻪ ﻏﻁﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻗﻭﻳﺎ ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﻧﻔﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ) ﺃﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺷﺭﻳﺔ ( ﻭﻳﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ) ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪3.‬‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻖ‪ 30‬ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎء ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻐﻣﺭ ‪4.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻛﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗــﺔ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ْ ٠٫٥ ±‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﺍء ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺟﺯﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻟﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺟﺯﻳﺋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪٦٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺻﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟــﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻭﺻﺔ (‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫) ﻣﻠﻡ (‬ ‫) ﻛﺟﻡ (‬
‫)‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬
‫‪4/3‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪2.00‬‬
‫‪2/1‬‬ ‫‪12.5‬‬ ‫‪1.5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ‪٤‬‬ ‫‪4.75‬‬ ‫‪0.500‬‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺣﺑﻳﺑـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﻣـﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋـﺎﺓ ﻋـﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻧـﺎﻋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ) ‪٦٫٤‬ﻣﻡ ( ‪ .‬ﻭﻣـﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻻ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻘـﻁ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺑـﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﺛﻡ ‪2.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ )ﺃ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﻣﺎء ﻛﺎﻑٍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ) ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ) ‪٥٧٧‬ﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﻭﺱ ﺑﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ) ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪3.‬‬
‫ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻖ ( ﻟﻣـﺩﺓ ‪ ٢ ± ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘـﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻬﺯﻫﺎ ﻫﺯﺍ ً ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺯﻩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟـﻲ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳـﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﻭﺱ ﺑﺈﺿـﺎﻓﺔ ﻋـﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺭﻭﺳﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪ ٪ ٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻠﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪١٠‬ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ )‪(OT‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺎء ‪ :‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﻧﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥١ ± ٢٥‬ﻡ ) ‪4. ٧٧‬‬
‫ﻑ ( ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻏﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١ ± ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﺻﺔ ‪± 51.8‬‬
‫‪) .‬ﺟـ( ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛـﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟـﻣﺎء ﻭﺗـﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪5.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ‪٥٠٫٥ ± ٢٥‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩﺋـﺫ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ‪(77 ± 51‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ١ ± ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬـﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ‪٣-٥‬‬
‫‪6.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺳــﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﻛﻣـﺎ ﻳﻠـﻲ ‪1.‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣـﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣـﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﻧـﺎء‬
‫) ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ = ﺃ ‪ ) /‬ﺃ – ﺟـ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺃ = ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ) ﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺟﻡ ( ﺟـ= ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣـﺎء‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣـﺎﻟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺍﻟـﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ = ﺃ ‪ ) /‬ﺃ ‪ +‬ﺩ ‪ -‬ﻫـ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺃ = ﻛﺗﻠـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﺍﻟﺟـﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬـﻭﺍء ) ﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ) ‪٥٧٧‬ﻑ ( ) ﺟﻡ ﺩ = ﻛﺗﻠﺔ‬
‫‪).‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ) ﻫـ‪ -‬ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٥٧٧ ) .‬ﻑ ( ) ﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ـ‪٢‬ـ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‪7‬‬
‫) ‪ ( AASHTO T 245-78‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺧـﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﺗﻳـﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃ ‪ -‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻣﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺏ‪ -‬ﻗﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻙ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺝ – ﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻣﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻗﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻣـﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﺗﺻﺑﺢ ‪ ,‬ﻳﻧـﺯﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﻳﺻﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﺳﺑﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺧﺭﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫‪ .‬ﺩ – ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﻪ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪١٠١٫٦‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ‪٧٦٫٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﻟﻳﺳﺗﻭﻋﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻣﻛﻪ ‪١٣‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﺅﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ ﻣﻧﺑﺳﻁ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁﻪ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ‪3.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪٤٥٣٦‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤٥٧٫٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﻧـﺯﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٤٥٧٫٢ × ٢٠٣٫٢ × ٢٠٣٫٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ‪4.‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﺑﻌـﺎﺩ ‪ ٢٥٫٤ × ٣٠٤٫٨ × ٣٠٤٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺷﺏ ﺑﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ً ﺯﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻗﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ‪5.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﻌﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﺎ )‪ (Breaking Head‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪6.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪٥٠٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺑﺭﺯ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﺿﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌـﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ – ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺇﻁـﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ‪7.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٥٠٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ‪٢٢٧٦‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ )‪ (Proving Ring‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ‪8.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻭﺳﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﺍﺩ ‪9.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺻﻔّﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻧـﺯﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺑـﻳﻥ ﻓﻛـﻲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛـﺳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛـﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻡ ) ‪ ٠٫٠١‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ( ﻟﻛﻝ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ 0.25‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ‪10.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻌﻪ ‪11.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻣﻘﻪ ‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ‪12.‬‬
‫ْﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻳﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 60± 1‬ﻋﻧـﺩ‬
‫‪٥٠٫٨ .‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪Asphalt‬ﺣـﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟـﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟـﻪ ﻟﻣﺧﻠـﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪13.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ْ ١±٢٥‬ﻡ ‪Cut Back ,‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪14. ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﻼﺓ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻗﺩﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ْ ٢٠٤ –٩٫٩‬ﻡ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ، .‬ﻭﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﺷﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺗﺣﺿﺭ )‪ (٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ )ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )‪ْ ١١٠ – ١٠٥‬ﻡ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ‪2.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻝ ‪ ١٫١٨ ، ٢٫٣٦ ، ٤٫٧٥ ، ٩٫٥ ، ١٩ ،٢٥‬ﻳﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﺄﻧـﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﻌـﻝ ‪3.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻣﻙ ﻓﻬﻲ )‪ (CST‬ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ٢٠±١٧٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ‬
‫‪ (CST) .‬ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣٠±٢٨٠‬ﺳﻧﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ‪4.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺎﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻠﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﻛﻪ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ‪١٢٠٠‬ﺟﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺣﺿﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪١٫٢٧ ±٦٣٫٥ 101.6‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ‪ ١٢‬ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧـﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﻋﻳﻧـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﺎ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪5.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪٥٢٨‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪٥٢٥‬ﻡ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٣-٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁﺔ ﻭﻳﺧﻠﻁ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﻔﺭ ﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪6.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻪ ‪ْ ١١٫١‬ﻡ ‪7.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪ ٣-٣‬ﺑﻣﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪٥٠‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺧﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻛﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ٪ ٥٠‬ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ‪١٥‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺳﺧﻧﺎﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻣﻐﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ١٤٨٫٩ – ٩٣٫٣‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﺗﺩﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻛﻳﻥ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺿﺭﺑﺔ ) ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ‪ 457.2‬ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ً ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﻁﺭﻕ ﻁﺭﻗﺎ ً ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺎ ً ﺟﺩﺍً ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ‪ ٥١٣٥‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗـﻡ ﺩﻣﻛﻬـﺎ ﻭﺑﺭﺩﺕ ﻭﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪1.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤٠– ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ١ ± ٦٠‬ﻡ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪± ٣٧٫٨‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ‪٥١‬ﻡ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻅﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪2.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪ – ٢١٫١‬ﺗﻧـﺯﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ٣٧٫٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻐﻣﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪3.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ ﻭﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺟﻳﺩﺍً ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ) ﺁﻟﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ( ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪٥٠٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪4.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ) ‪ Proving Ring‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ) ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺳﺟﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٠٫٢٥٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ‪٠٫٠١‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪٦٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺗﺿﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ‪5.‬‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ١٥‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻣﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣ‬ ‫ﺣﺟــﻡ‬
‫) ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ‬
‫( ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳـﺢ‬ ‫)ﺳﻡ‪(٣‬‬
‫)ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫‪25.‬‬ ‫‪213‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪- 200‬‬
‫‪5.0‬‬ ‫‪27.‬‬ ‫‪225‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪- 214‬‬
‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫‪28.‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪- 226‬‬
‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫‪30.‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪- 238‬‬
‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪31.‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪- 251‬‬
‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫‪33.‬‬ ‫‪276‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪- 265‬‬
‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪34.‬‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪– 277‬‬
‫‪3.0‬‬ ‫‪36.‬‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪- 290‬‬
‫‪2.7‬‬ ‫‪38.‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪- 302‬‬
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪39.‬‬ ‫‪328‬‬
0 7 - 317
2.2 41. 340
7 3 - 329
2.0 42. 353
8 9 - 341
1.9 44. 367
2 4 - 354
1.7 46. 379
9 0 - 368
1.6 47. 392
7 6 – 380
1.5 49. 405
6 2 - 393
1.4 50. 420
7 8 - 406
1.3 52. 431
9 4 - 421
1.3 54. 443
2 0 – 432
1.2 55. 456
5 6 – 444
1.1 57. 470
9 2 – 457
1.1 58. 482
4 7 – 471
1.0 60. 495
9 3 – 483
1.0 61. 508
4 9 – 496
1.0 63. 522
0 5 - 509
0.9 6 535
6 4.0 – 523
0.9 65. 546
3 1 – 536
0.8 66. 559
9 7 – 547
0.8 68. 573
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪– 560‬‬
‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪71.‬‬ ‫‪585‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪– 574‬‬
‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪73.‬‬ ‫‪598‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪– 586‬‬
‫‪0.7‬‬ ‫‪74.‬‬ ‫‪610‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪– 599‬‬
‫‪0.7‬‬ ‫‪76.‬‬ ‫‪625‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪- 611‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٥‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪6.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪7.‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﻛﻣـﺎ ﺗـﻡ ﺫﻛﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ( ASTM D 2725 - AASHTO T- 166 ) ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﺭ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﺎﺕ ( ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ) ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫)‪ (٪‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﺎﺕ ( ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ (٪) .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ )‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻛﻼً ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ( ) ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫‪ ) .‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ) ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ) ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ) ﻗﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ . 3-5٪‬ﺃﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪٪ ٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻭﻳﺩﻗﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ( ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ( ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻓﻳﻌﺩﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪) .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺷـﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑـﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ١٧‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ‪8.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺣﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺯﻓﻠﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫) ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ) ﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٧‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬ ‫‪1+2+3+4‬‬

‫‪= 000٪‬‬
‫= ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪+5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٨‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳـــﺎﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻣﻥ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬

‫) ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء )‬
‫) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺷﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫) )ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ) ﺳﻡ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ )ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫) ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﺑﺔ )‬
‫) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪+‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻕ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺻﻭﻓﺔ )ﺟﺭﺍﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ) ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻰ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺻﻰ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫) ﺍﻟﺛﺑـﺎﺕ ) ﻛﺟـﻡ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫) ) ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫) ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ) ﻛﺟـﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫) ) ﻛﺟـﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫) ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ) ﻛﺟـﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻗــﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﺑـﺎﺕ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫) ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ ) ﻣﻠــﻡ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺏ )‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫) ﻣﻠـﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫) ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ) ﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ‪٪‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻰ ﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪٣‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘـــﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻧـﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ - ٨‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ‬

‫‪Superpave asphalt mix Design procedures‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻫﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠـﺗﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﻳﺎ ً ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﻅﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﻣﻥ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﺩﻡ )‪ (Impact Compaction‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﺷﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ )‪ (Superpave‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ )‪ (Superpave‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ‪. superior performing asphalt pavement‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻘﺩ ﺍﺑﺗﻛﺭﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺣﺛﻲ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺎﺭﺏ )‪ . (SHRP‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺍﺑﺗﻛﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺧﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ( ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ )‪. (Models‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ﺑﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (ESALs‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺧﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ )‪ (Rutting Level‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﻛﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻭﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺑﺗﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻟﺗﻳﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻣﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ‪ SST) )tester superpave shear‬ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ‪(Tester (ITT Indirect Tensile‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٩‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ) ‪( Superpave‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢٠‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ‬

‫] ‪RV ] = Rotational Viscometer‬‬
‫] ‪Rheometer DSR ] = Dynamic Shear‬‬
‫] ‪DTT ] = Direct Tension Tester‬‬
‫] ‪Rheometer BBR ] = Bending Beam‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ‬
‫‪٨‬ـ‪ ١‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ‪(Rotational Viscometer (RV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ‪AASHTO PP-6:‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪ (Workability‬ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗـﺎﻟﻳـﺔ ‪- :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻳـﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻧـﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭﻫــﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪- :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ) ‪ ٢٥٠ – ٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ( ﻭﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪. ١٫٠‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻛـﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪١‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﻣﻧﻅﻡ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪٥٣٠٠‬ﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪٪٥ ±‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ١٣ – ٨‬ﻣﻠﻠﻳﻠﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ – ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ – ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻭﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻵﻟـﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻧﻅﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻣﻊ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢١‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬

‫‪٨‬ـ‪ ٢‬ﺭﻳﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ‪(Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔــﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳــﺔ ‪( AASHTO TP5) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬـﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧـﺩﻣـﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﻬـﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛـﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺋـﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺁﻟـﻲ ﻭﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬـﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠـﺔ ﻟﻠﻣـﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁـﺔ ﻋﻧـﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣـﺩﺓ ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿـﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠـﺔ ﻋﻧـﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣـﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧـﻪ ﻳﻣﻛـﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻛﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣـﺩﻯ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣـﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳـﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ ) ‪ ( AASHTO TP5‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁـﻪ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠـﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺁﻟـﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗـﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﻳﻠـﻲ ‪- :‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣ –١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ‪ ) .‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺭﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺛﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ( ﻣﻊ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳـﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻣﺣﻠﻝ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﻳﺻـﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭ ﺭﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺗﺣﻠﻳـﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣـﺔ ﺃﺑﻌـﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ‪ ٪٢‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ) ‪ ( G‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺳﻛـﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪٦‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﺭﻳﻥ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ ‪٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋـﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻣـﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢٢‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‬

‫ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺋـﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻠﻑ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻔﺭﻭﻕ ) ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧـﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋـﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋـﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺿـﺎﺑﻁ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺭﻣﺟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳـﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻵﻟــﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺍ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ) ‪ ، ( AASHTO TP 5‬ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﻣـﺟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻷﺩﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﻱ )ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺭ )‪ (٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، ٪٢٠٠‬ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟـﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻛـﻭﻳﻥ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻻﻧﺳﻳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻟﻙ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻸﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻛﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻳﻭﻣﻳﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ) ‪( Bending Beam Rheometer‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ) ‪( Direct Tension Test‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳـــﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣ – ٨‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ‪(Superpave Shear Tester (SST‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺭﺟﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻫﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻲ – ﺳﺭﻓﻭﺍ ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻣﻲ ‪Volumetric test‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪Uniaxial strain test‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪Stress Ratio Repeatel Shear Test At Constant‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪Simple shear test at constant height‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫‪height Frequency Sweep test at constant‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪heigh Repeated shear test at constant‬‬
‫) ﻭﻫﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝ ‪( Superpave‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢٣‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ‬

‫‪ ١ – ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻣﻲ ‪Volumetric test‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫(ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ)‬ ‫‪( 5‬ﻡ )‬
‫‪830‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪690‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪550‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫‪ ٢ - ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪Uniaxial Strain test‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻣﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪655‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪550‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪345‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫‪ ٣ – ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪Constant Repeated Shear Test at‬‬
‫‪Stress Ratio‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻲ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺧﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ‪ ، Tertiary Rutting‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺩﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺗﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤ - ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪height Simple Shear test at constant‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ) ‪ ( Intermediate‬ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧــﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴــﻞ‬
‫‪345‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻛــﺎﻣــﻞ‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫( ‪Teff‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫) ‪PD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘـــﻮﺳـﻂ‬
‫( ‪Toff‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫) ‪FC‬‬
‫‪ ٥ – ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪constant Frequency sweep test at‬‬
‫‪height‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٪ ٠٫٠٠٥‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ٤٠ ، ٢٠ ، ٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ Teff‬ﻭ ‪Toff‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺻﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦ – ٣ – ٨‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪constant Repeated shear test at‬‬
‫‪heigh‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺗﻳـﺔ ) ‪( SUPER PAVE‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ـ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪Indirect Tensile test‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺣﻑ )‪ (creep‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﻓﻠﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ) > ‪٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ( ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٩‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻋﻪ ﻛﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻳﺭﺍﺯﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁ – ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑـﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻁﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺗﻭءﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﺎ ً ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺭﺍﺯﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺿﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ " ﻓﺭﺍﻍ"‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺧﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ‪ ) ٪٠٫٥‬ﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﻣﻖ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٪ ٠٫٣ ±‬ﻣﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪٠٫١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٫٥ ±‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻸﻁﻭﺍﻝ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻋﻥ ‪ ٣ ±‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻸﻁﻭﺍﻝ ‪٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪. ٪ ١ ±‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺭﺍﺯﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ ‪ -‬ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪٠٫١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁـﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺑـﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺭﺍﺯﻭ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻳﺭﺍﺯﻭ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘـﻝ‬
‫ﻋـﻥ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬ـ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﻭﺽ ﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺽ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ )‪ (٥‬ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺟﺞ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٪ ٤-٣‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (٥‬ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻋﻥ ‪ ٪ ١٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥ ±١١٠‬ﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪. ٪٠٫١‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪ ٠٫١‬ﺟﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ – ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺽ ﻣﺎء ﻳﻐﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻛﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪١‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢ ±١٠٠‬ﻡ ْ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥ ±١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ – ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢ ± ٢٠‬ﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ–‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٪ × 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ= ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء – ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٢ْ ± ٢٠‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥٠ – ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٢ ± ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٪ × 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ = ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﺐ – ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٠٫٤‬ﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪ ، ٢‬ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁـﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ، ٪٨‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺷﻠﺕ ﺑﻼﻁﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺷﻠﺕ ﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳـﺔ ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘـﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺹ ) ﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ ( ٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻧﺳﺑـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳـﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬ـ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻛﺳـﺭ ﺍﻟﺑــﻼﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ )‪ (٣‬ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺅﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ )‪ (١٠٠‬ﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﻼﻁﺗﺎﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ )‪ (٢٠٠‬ﺑﻼﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٦‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٢/٣‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﻲ ) ﻧﺗﻳﻭﺗﻥ ‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪٢‬‬

‫= ×ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ × ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻴﺰﺗﻴﻦ ) ﻣﻠﻢ )‬
‫)‬
‫× ‪2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁﺔ × ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺿﻣـﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳـﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ـ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﺄﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٢٤‬ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ "‪، "guage‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﻓﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻛﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﻳﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺟﻌﻝ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﻳﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻗﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪٠٫٠١‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٪٠٫٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺷﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬ـ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺃ – ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﺑﺛﻼﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ٢٤‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺗﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ – ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ) ﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﺏ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﻋﻥ ‪٠٫٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻖ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺣﺩﺑﺎ ً ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻌﺭ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ‬
‫‪.٪٠٫٤‬‬
‫‪١٠‬ـ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺃ – ﻳﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻬﻣﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﺧﻠﻭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻓﺣﺹ )‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺃ – ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﺭﻏﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﻣﺗﺎ ً ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪٦ ±‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪٣ ±‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫×‪400 × 200‬‬
‫‪٪ 51‬‬ ‫‪± 6‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬
‫‪200‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫×‪400 × 200‬‬
‫‪٪ 43‬‬ ‫‪± 6‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬
‫‪150‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫×‪400 × 200‬‬
‫‪٪ 37‬‬ ‫‪± 6‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬
‫‪100‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫×‪400 × 200‬‬
‫‪٪ 31‬‬ ‫‪± 3‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬
‫‪70‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫×‪400 × 200‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪± 3‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﺖ‬
‫‪70‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ) ‪ ( ١٦‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺏ – ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑـﺔ ‪ ٢٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻣـﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪١٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ ١٩٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌـﺩﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻥ ‪٣±‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭ‪ ١٫٥ ±‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭ ‪ ١ ±‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٣ ± ٢٠‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ْ ٥±١١٠‬ﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٪ × 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ= ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺮ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ – ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻳـﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
The Islamic University of Gaza ‫اﻟﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ اﻹﺳﻼﻣﯾﺔ – ﻏزة‬
Material & Soil Laboratories ‫ﻣﺧﺗﺑرات اﻟﻣواد واﻟﺗرﺑﺔ‬
Telephone: ++ 972 8 2644400 x 1320
Fax: ++ 972 8 2641410
ASPHALT JOB MIX DESIGN

FOR
Mushtaha & Hassouna Contracting Co.
3/4" Binder Course Mix
Project
Constructing of His Highness Sheikh Hamad Bin Khalifa Al-Thani
Residential City-Khan Younis
Infrastructure Works and Internal Gardens Phase II
(GF/B-C/74/2016)
AL QA'OUD ASPHALT FACTORY
Report No.: 1700182

Date: 08/01/2017
1
MSL THE ISLAMIC UNIVERSITY –MATERIAL & SOIL LABS
ASPHALT MIX DESIGN

BINDER COURSE 3/4² MIX
2
INTRODUCTION
The Material & Soil Lab of the Islamic University has been
requested by " Mushtaha & Hassouna Contracting Co." to perform
job mix design for Asphalt Binder Course (3/4²) according to "The
Qatar Committee for the reconstruction of the Gaza Strip", Project
Specifications and Ministry of Housing & Public works
Specifications.
1- SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
The requirements for BINDER Course layer of the asphalt mix

designs are:
* Marshal Stability Min 900 kg

* Marshal Flow (2-4) mm
* Percent Air Voids (3%-7%)
* Voids of Mineral aggregate (V.M.A) Min 13.5%
* Stiffness (kg/mm)
* No of blows for Marshal Compaction 75 blows
* Voids Fill of Bitumen (V.F.B) 60-70
* Bitumen content (% in weight) 4.0 – 7.0
3
2- MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A- AGGREGATES (HOT BIN)
Asphalt mix design 3/4² Binder course

Al Qa'oud Asphalt Factory
Material Type: Crushed Limestone.
a- Sieve Analysis:
Sieve Diam % Passing By Weight

No. (mm) Medium Medium Medium Mediu Fine Filler
(I)- (II)- (II)-Adas m (III)- (Agg)
Folia5 Folia4 Simsim (Trabiya)
1” 25 - 100 100 100 100 100

3/4² 19 - 100 100 100 100 100
12² 12.5 - 99.4 91.4 100 100 100
3/8² 9.5 - 16.9 30.7 99.5 98.6 100
#4 4.75 - 4.2 0.4 56.1 92.2 100
#8 2.36 - 0.1 0.2 4.8 67.1 100
#20 0.800 - 0.1 0.2 1.1 48.2 99.7
#30 0.600 - 0.1 0.2 1.0 38.7 99.35
#50 0.300 - 0.1 0.2 0.9 29.5 98.2
#80 0.177 - 0.1 0.2 0.9 17.0 94.2
#200 0.075 - 0.1 0.2 0.8 10.7 85.0
b- Physical Properties:
Medium Medium Medium Mediu Fine Filler

(I)- (II)- (II)-Adas m (III)- (Agg)
Folia5 Folia4 Simsim (Trabiy
a)
Bulk dry Sp. Gravity - 2.51 2.54 2.57 2.58 -
SSD Sp. Gravity - 2.56 2.60 2.63 2.64 -
Apparent Sp. Gravity - 2.64 2.70 2.74 2.74 -
Water Absorption % - 2.05 2.35 2.43 2.30 -
Liquid Limit % - NP NP NP NP NP
Plasticity Index % - NP NP NP NP NP
Los Angeles % 26 - - -
Sand Equivalent % - - - - 71 -
4
II- WEARING MATERIAL

CEMENTED ASPHALT Grade 60-70
Source : Egypt-Emarat
Physical Properties:
No. Physical Properties ASTM Sample Specification

Standard
1 Softening Point-ring& ball D36 50.5 48-56

(C )
2 Penetration (1/10 mm)-25c D5 60 60-70
3 Ductility cm D113 150 Min 100
4 Flash Point (F) D3143 308 Min 230
5 Solubility (%) D2042 99.2 98
5
SUMMARY OF JOB MIX PROPERTIES

BINDER COURSE 3/4²
Job Mix Formula:
Recommended Proportion by Weight
Hot Bin: Medium Aggregate I - (F5) 0.00 %
Hot Bin: Medium Aggregate II – ( F4) 12.70 %
Hot Bin: Medium Aggregate III - Adas 25.40%
Hot Bin: Medium Aggregate III - Simsim 20.10 %
Hot Bin: Fine Aggregate( Trabia ) 39.70 %
Hot Bin: Filler (Separate bin) 2.10 %
100%
% Passing by Weight
Sieve Diam. Job Mix Specification Tolerance
No. (mm) % Min Max
1 1/2" 37.5 100 100 100
1” 25 100 100 100 ---
3/4² 19 98 70 100 ±5
12² 12.5 72 53 90 ±5
3/8² 9.5 53 40 80 ±5
#4 4.75 40 30 56 ±4
#8 2.36 29 23 49 ±4
#20 0.800 21 14 43 ±4
#30 0.600 18 ±4
#50 0.300 14 5 19 ±4
#80 0.180 9.0 4 15 ±4
#200 0.075 6.2 2 8 ±1.5
6
3- RECOMMENDED BITUMEN CONTENT
The following bitumen content and the corresponding mix properties

were attained:
a- Optimum bitumen content:
The optimum bitumen content is obtained from the following criteria:
Criteria % Asphalt Content
* Maximum Stability 5.6%

* Maximum Density 5.65%
* Air Void in Mix 5.25%
* Average: 5.50%
Bitumen content of 5.50% with a tolerance of + 0.30% by

weight of total mix is recommended as the optimum binder content.
7
b- Mix Properties:
The corresponding properties at the recommended asphalt content are:
* Recommended bitumen content by weight of total mix (%) 5.5

* Recommended bitumen content by weight of aggregate (%) 5.8
* Bulk dry specific gravity (kg/m3) 2354
* Stability (kg) 1761
* Flow (mm) 3.0
* % Air voids of total mix 4.1
15.4
* Voids of Mineral aggregate (V.M.A)
73
* Voids Fill of Bitumen (V.F.B)
8
NOTES
1) This mix design is valid only for the materials having the same
properties in this mix job report.
2) Should any of the materials properties altered, this mix is no
longer valid and a new mix design should be done.
3) Prior to any production of asphalt mix, the factory has to carry a
trial mix at the mixing plant to confirm the materials and mix
properties. In case of any change, the MSL should be informed prior
to any production.
4) The client is requested to carry field trial strips to achieve good
performance in the field as well.
5) A proper quality control for the production of the mix should be
done daily.
6) A proper quality control should be done occasionally for the
aggregate and the bitumen.
7) All tests were carried according to ASTM standards.
With Best Regards,,,,
Designed by:
Engineer: Monther El-Swaisy Engineer: Adel HAMAD
9
APPENDIX
TEST RESULTS
10
MSL THE ISLAMIC UNIVERSITY –MATERIAL SOIL LABS
BITUMEN EXTRACTION TEST

(ASTM D2172)
CLIENT ‫ ﻣﺪﯾﻨﺔ ﺣﻤﺪ‬- ‫ﻣﺼﻨﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﻮد‬ SAMPLELAB NO. 170018
PROJECT Mix Design SAMPLE DATE 03/01/2017
LOCATION - SOURCE Hot bin

‫ﻧظري‬ Sample No. 1
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION 3/4''
12.00% 24.00% 19.00% 0.00% 37.50% 2.00%

SIEVE OPENING MIX. SPECIFICATION 12.7% 25.4% 20.1% 0.0% 39.7% 2.1%
NO mm %PASSING MIN MAX FOULIA4 ADASIA SIMSIM Sand TRABIYAFILLER
1 1/2" 37.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1" 25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
3/4" 19 98 70 100 99.4 91.4 100 100 100 100
1/2" 12.5 72 53 90 16.9 30.7 99.5 100 100 100
3/8" 9.5 53 40 80 4.2 0.4 56.1 100 98.6 100
#4 4.75 40 30 56 0.1 0.2 4.8 100 92.2 100
#8 2.36 29 23 49 0.1 0.2 1.1 100 67.1 100
#20 0.800 21 14 43 0.1 0.2 1.0 100 48.2 99.7
#30 0.600 18 0.1 0.2 0.9 99.3 38.7 99.35
#50 0.300 14 5 19 0.1 0.2 0.9 72.0 29.5 98.2
#80 0.180 9.0 4 15 0.1 0.2 0.8 7.7 17.0 94.2
#200 0.075 6.2 2 8 0.1 0.2 0.8 0.6 10.7 85.0
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
CHEKED BY : M. El-Swaisy SIGNATURE:
11
COARSE AGGREGATE TESTS

PROJECT MIX DESIGN LAB. NO: 170018
CLIENT ‫ ﻣﺪﯾﻨﺔ ﺣﻤﺪ‬- ‫ﻣﺼﻨﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﻮد‬ DATE 03/01/2017
LOCATION 1 SOURCE Hot bin
Sample FOLIYA
SIEVE ANALYSIS
SIEVE SIZE SIEVE # SAMPLE
(mm) % Passing
25 1'' 100.0 Bulk Gs (SSD) 2.56
19 3/4'' 99.4 Bulk Gs (DRY) 2.51
12.5 1/2'' 16.9 Bulk Gs (APPARENT) 2.64
9.5 3/8'' 4.2 %Absorption 2.05
4.75 #4 0.1
2.36 #8 0.1
1.18 # 16 0.1
0.075 # 200 0.1
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
%Passing
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Sieve size(mm)
CHECKED BY : A. HAMED SIGNATURE:
12

Sample ‫ﻋدﺳﯾﺔ‬
SIEVE ANALYSIS
(mm) % Passing
19 3/4'' 91.4
12.5 1/2'' 30.7
9.5 3/8'' 0.4 Bulk Gs (SSD) 2.60
4.75 #4 0.2 Bulk Gs (DRY) 2.54
2.36 #8 0.2 Bulk Gs (APPARENT) 2.70
0.80 #20 0.2 %Absorption 2.35
0.600 #30 0.2
0.300 #50 0.2 % Abrasion of Coarse Agg. 22
0.180 #80 0.2
0.075 #200 0.2
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
%Passing
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Sieve size(mm)
13

Sample SIMSIMYA
SIEVE ANALYSIS
(mm) % Passing
19 3/4" 100.0
12.5 1/2" 99.5
9.5 3/8'' 56.1
4.75 #4 4.8 Bulk Gs (SSD) 2.63
2.36 #8 1.1 Bulk Gs (DRY) 2.57
0.80 #20 1.0 Bulk Gs (APPARENT) 2.74
0.600 #30 0.9 %Absorption 2.43
0.300 #50 0.9
0.180 #80 0.8
0.075 #200 0.8
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
%passing
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Sieve size (mm)
14

CLIENT ‫ ﻣﺪﯾﻨﺔ ﺣﻤﺪ‬- ‫ﻣﺼﻨﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﻮد‬ SAMPLE LAB NO. 170018
PROJECT MIX DESIGN SAMPLE DATE 03/01/2017
Sample No. ‫ﺗراﺑﯾﺔ‬
SIEVE ANALYSIS
(mm) % Passing
9.5 3/8'' 98.6
4.75 #4 92.2 Bulk Gs (SSD) 2.64
2.36 #8 67.1 Bulk Gs (DRY) 2.58
0.80 #20 48.2 Bulk Gs (APPARENT) 2.74
0.600 #30 38.7 %Absorption 2.3
0.300 #50 29.5
0.180 #80 15.9
0.075 #200 10.7
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
%passing
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Sieve size (mm)
-: ‫ﻣﻼﺣظﺎت‬
‫ھذه اﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺧص اﻟﻌﯾﻧﺎت اﻟﻣﻔﺣوﺻﺔ ﻓﻘط‬
‫ﻻ ﯾﺟوزاﺻدار ھذا اﻟﺗﻘرﯾر اﻻ ﺑﻣواﻓﻘﺔ ﺧطﯾﺔ ﻣن اﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑر‬
CHECKED BY :M.El Swaisy SIGNATURE:
15

Sample ‫ﻓﻠﯾر ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
SIEVE ANALYSIS
(mm) % Passing
4.75 #4 100.0
2.36 #8 100.0
0.80 #20 99.7
0.600 #30 99.4
0.300 #50 98.2
0.180 #80 94.2
0.075 #200 85.0
100.0
%passing
90.0
80.0
0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00
Sieve size (mm)
16
MARSHALL TEST RESULTS

ASTM(D1559) '3/4"
PROJECT Asphalt Mix Design SAMPLE LAB. NO: 170018

CLIENT ‫ ﻣدﯾﻧﺔ ﺣﻣد‬-‫ﻣﺻﻧﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﻋود‬ SAMPLE DATE 2017/01/08
LOCATION 4.5 TESTING DATE 2017/01/08
MARSHALL CRITERIA: SOURCE Hot bin
NO OF BLOWS ON EACH FACE :75 BLWS
TEST DESCRIPTION SAMPLE NO AVERAGE LIMITS

1 2 3 project spec
WEIGHT OF SAMPLE IN AIR (gm) 1221.9 1208.1 1235.4
WEIGHT OF SAMPLE SSD (gm) 1224.8 1210.5 1237.1
WEIGHT OF SAMPLE IN WATER (gm) 695.4 690.8 705.8
SAMPLE VOLUME (cm3) 529.4 519.7 531.3
BULK DRY SPECIFIC GRAVITY (kg/m3) 2308 2325 2325 2319 >2300
MAX SPECIFIC GRAVITY ( gm/cm3) 2480 2480 2480 2480

MARSHALL STABILITY READING (kn) 1000 1005 1004 1003
STABILITY CORRECTION FACTOR 1.0 1.0 1.0
CORRECTED STABILITY (kg) 1360.0 1366.8 1365.4 1364 >900

PLASTIC FLOW (mm) 2.05 2.08 2.07 2.1 2-4
STIFFNESS Kg/mm 663 657 660 660 >500
AIR VOIDS OF TOTAL MIX (V.T.M)% 6.93 6.27 6.24 6.48 3-7%
VOIDS OF MINERAL AGG. (V.M.A)% 16.2 15.6 15.6 15.8 min 13.5
VOIDS FILL WITH BITUMEN(V.F.B)% 57.2 59.8 59.9 59.0 60-75
% Bitumen Content of Total Mix % 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.0-7.0
‫ اﻟﻣﻘﺎول‬/ ‫أﺣﺿرت اﻟﻌﯾﻧﺎت ﺑﻣﻌرﻓﺔ اﻻﺷراف‬
CHECKED BY :M-EL.Swaisy SIGNATURE:
17

ASTM(D1559) '3/4"

LOCATION 5 TESTING DATE 2017/01/08

1 2 3 project spec
SAMPLE VOLUME (cm3) 513.1 521.4 522.0


PLASTIC FLOW (mm) 2.90 2.70 2.17 2.6 2-4
STIFFNESS Kg/mm 556 565 698 606 >500
VOIDS FILL WITH BITUMEN(V.F.B)% 63.9 64.5 63.6 64 60-75
18

ASTM(D1559) '3/4"


1 2 3 project spec
SAMPLE VOLUME (cm3) 515.8 518.4 519.9


PLASTIC FLOW (mm) 3.07 3.03 3.04 3.0 2-4
STIFFNESS Kg/mm 611 554 570 578 >500
19

ASTM(D1559) '3/4"


1 2 3 project spec
SAMPLE VOLUME (cm3) 511.6 519.5 512.6


PLASTIC FLOW (mm) 3.90 3.86 3.77 3.8 2-4
STIFFNESS Kg/mm 385 392 422 400 >500
20
4- SUMMARY OF ASPHALT TRIAL MIX PROPERTIES
ASPHALT MIX DESIGN 3/4" BINDER COURSE
MATERIAL TYPE : CRUSHED LIMESTONE -

No OF MARSHAL BLOWS : ( 75 ) COMPACTION TEMPERATURE : 150 oC.
%ASPHALT %ASPHALT BULK MARSHAL VOIDA OF VOID FILL

mix AC/Agg AC/T.WT DENSITY STABILITY FLOW AIR VOIDS MINERAL Agg. BY BITUMN
No. % % kg/m3 Kg mm (A.V) % VMA (%) V.F.B.%
1 6.4 6.0 2343 1535 3.8 2.77 16.3 83
2 4.7 4.5 2319 1364 2.07 6.48 15.8 59
3 5.3 5.0 2336 1551 2.59 5.63 15.6 64
4 5.8 5.5 2354 1761 3.05 4.09 15.4 73
The results are plotted on the following curves:
RECOMMENDED BINDER CONTENT :

The following binder content and the corresponding mix properties were attained:
a- optimum binder content:
The optimum binder content is obtained from the following criteria :
Asphalt Content at:

- Maximum stability 5.60
- Maximum density 5.65
- Air void in Mix(5.0%) 5.25
5.50
Bitumen content of 5.5% by weight of total mix is recommended as the optimum binder
content., the bitument content telorance is + 0.3 %.
21
b - Mix Properties:
The corresponding properties at the recommended binder content are:
- Recommended bitumen content by

weight of total mix(%) 5.5
- Recommended bitumen content by

weight of aggregate(%) 5.8
- Bulk Dry Specific Gravity (kg/m3) 2354
- Stability ( kg) 1761
- Flow (mm) 3.0
- Stiffness (kg/mm) 578
- % Air voids of total mix 4.1
- V.M.A. 15.4
- V.F.B. 73
NOTES:
1- This mix design is valid only for the materials having the same properties in this mix job report.
2- Should any of the materials properties altered , this mix is no longer valid and a new mix design
should be done.
3- Prior to any production of asphalt mix, the factory has to carry a trial mix at the mixing plant to
confirm the materials and mix properties.
In case of any change, the MSL should be informed prior to any production.
4- The client is requested to carry field trial strips to achieve good performance in the field as well.
5- A proper qulaity control for the production of the mix should be done daily .
6- A proper qulaity control should be done occasionally for the aggregate and the bitumen.
7- All tests were carried according to ASTM Standards.
with best Regards

Lab. Engineer Lab. Engineer
Monther El-Swaisy Adel Hamed
22
7.00
2360
6.50
2355
6.00
2350
5.50
BULK DENSITY Kg/m3
AIR VOIDS(A.V)%
2345
5.00
2340
4.50
2335
4.00
2330
3.50
2325
3.00
2320
2.50
2315
2.00
2310 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Binder Content %
Binder Content %
16.3 85
16.2
16.1 80
16.0
75
15.9
V.M.A (%)
V.FB( %)
15.8 70
15.7
15.6 65
15.5
60
15.4
15.3 55
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Binder Content % Binder Content %
1900 4.0
3.8
1800
MARSHAL STABILITY Kg
3.6
1700
3.4
1600
FLOW mm
3.2
1500
3.0
1400
2.8
1300 2.6
1200 2.4
1100 2.2
1000 2.0
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Binder Content % Binder Content %
23

50/70 PENETRATION GRADE BITUMEN

Penetration Grade Bitumen
Product Data Sheet 2013/09

DESCRIPTION
50/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen is produced from the vacuum distillation of crude oil and is classified according to its
penetration range.
USES
50/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen is used in the manufacture of hotmix asphalt for base courses and wearing courses.
PROPERTIES
50/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen is a thermoplastic material which softens gradually as it is heated and hardens as it is
cooled. This unique temperature/viscosity relationship is important when determining its performance parameters and
application temperatures. Unlike modified binders, penetration grade bitumen acts as a Newtonian fluid at high in-service
temperatures, which allows one to establish a temperature/viscosity relationship.
SPECIFICATIONS
50/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen conforms to the SANS 4001-BT1:2012 specification for penetration grade bitumen:
50/70 REQUIREMENTS
BINDER PROPERTIES TEST METHOD
Min Max
Before Ageing
Penetration @ 25ºC/100g/5s, 1/10 mm 50 70 EN 1426
Softening point, ºC 46 56 ASTM D 36
Dynamic viscosity @ 60ºC, Pa.s 140 - ASTM D 4402
Dynamic viscosity @ 135ºC, Pa.s 0,22 0,45 ASTM D 4402
After Ageing (RTFO)
Mass change % m/m - 0,3 ASTM D 2872
Dynamic viscosity @ 60ºC, % of original, Pa.s - 300 ASTM D 4402
Softening point, ºC 48 - ASTM D 36
Increase in softening point, ºC - 7 ASTM D 36
Retained penetration, % of original 55 - EN 1426
Spot test, % xylene - 30 AASHTO T102
DIRECTIONS FOR USE

Recommended storage and handling criteria for 50/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen
Asphalt mixing temperature 150 - 160°C

Asphalt compaction temperature 135 - 145°C
< 24 hours > 24 hours
Maximum storage temperatures
160°C 140°C
Head Office
Cape Town PO Box 82 Eppindust 7475 Tel +27 (0)21 531 6406 Fax +27 (0)21 531 5514 Email colas@colas.co.za Website www.colas.co.za
Colas provides the above data sheet in good faith and it is provided without warranty, representation, inducement or licence of any kind; as such Colas shall not be liable for cost, damages or
losses incurred as a result of reliance on the abovementioned information.
Study of RuBind
PG grade + JnR – Israel Bitumen
1. Objectives and Scope
This report presents a summary of results undertaken to evaluate the binder properties of bitumens
sent from DSI – Israel. Some of which were also further modified with RuBind 1 sent from RuBind Inc.
All the tests were executed in Consulpav. The bitumens received were designated 68, 70, 76 and S.
The bitumens chosen to be modified were 68 and S.
2. Type of Rubind
The Rubind mixture is a combination of Rubber (crushed rubber), iBind and a small percentage of
Bitumen. In this study different percentages of RuBind 1, namely 7, 14, 21 e 28% were added to modify
the bitumen.
3. Bitumen Properties
The characterization of bitumens for road paving is performed through determination of their properties
in relation to its mechanical behavior. In this case, the characterization of bitumens involves the
evaluation of viscosity, penetration, softening point and resilience test.
3.1. Viscosity
The rotational viscometer determines the asphalt viscosity by measuring the torque necessary to
maintain a constant rotational speed of a cylindrical spindle submerged in an asphalt specimen held at
a constant temperature, as per the AASHTO TP48 standard test method.
EST 11_12 Page 4/32

.
Study of RuBind
VISCOSÍMETRO BROOKFIELD
zoom
torção
mostrador digital
BROOKFIELD
MODEL DV-II-+
VISCOSIMETER
amostra
comandos câmara
da amostra
motor veio
extensão do veio
contentor térmico regulador da temperatura

ver zoom
Thermosel
Thermosel
grelha de protecção
135,0 ºC
Figure 1 Diagram and photograph of Rotational Viscometer
Viscosity test was conducted using BrookField viscometer on 4 bitumens. The dynamic viscosity
measurement was made at 175ºC.
3.2. Softening Point (Ring and Ball)
Ring and ball is the standard test to determine the consistency of the bitumen, which represent the
temperature at which a change of phase from solid to liquid occurs. It is the temperature at which
standard 3/8 inch steel ball weighing 3.55gm fall and touches the base plate which is 2.5mm away.
The test is conducted according to specification ASTM D 36.
Legend:
1 - Bitumen Sample deformed
2 - Thermometer
3 - Ball
4 - Ring with a sample of bitumen
5 - Glass container with water
Figure 2 Test for determination of the softening point by ring and ball method
EST 11_12 Page 5/32

.
Study of RuBind
Figure 3 Ring and ball test - when both balls fall to the base
3.3. Penetration
Penetration Test determines the hardness of Bitumen by measuring the depth ( in tenths of a mm) to
which a standard, and loaded needle will vertically penetrate in 5 seconds, a sample of Bitumen
maintained at a temperature of 25º C (Figure 4).
The test is conducted according to specification ASTM D5-97.
Figure 4 Representative scheme of the penetration bitumen test and equipment used
EST 11_12 Page 6/32

.
Study of RuBind
3.4. Resilience
Measures the elastic properties of the binder and is expressed as a percentage of rebound for the
binder. Resilience is one of the most important properties in the specifications and is a more reliable
measure of elasticity.
The test is conducted according to specification ASTM D 5329-96.
Figure 5 Resilience Test
3.5. Results
In Table 1 and in Figure 7 are presented the results of tests carried out to 4 bitumens.
Table 1 – Summary of tests results
Bitumen Viscosity Ring and Ball Penetration Resilience
68 98 53 33 13
70 110 54 32 14
Israel
76 120 63 20 17
S 65 47 74 1
EST 11_12 Page 7/32

.
Study of RuBind
Viscosity Ring and Ball Softening Point

140 65
Ring and Ball Softening Point, ºC

Brookfield Viscosity, cP, 175ºC
120
60
100
80 55
60 50
40
45
20
0 40
68 70 76 S 68 70 76 S
Bitumen Bitumen
Penetration Resilience
80 20
Penetration, mm/10 at 25ºC
70
Resilience, Recovery %
60
50
40 10
30
20
10
0 0
68 70 76 S 68 70 76 S
Bitumen Bitumen
Figure 6 Graphic results
In Table 2 and Figure 7 are presented the results obtained on bitumen 68 and S for different
percentages of RuBind 1 (7, 14, 21 e 28%).
EST 11_12 Page 8/32

.

Road Lab

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Road Lab

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫ﻣﺧﺗﺑر اﻟطرق‬

ROAD QUALITY CONTROL

I- Flexible Pavements (asphalt)

II- Rigid Pavement (Portland Cement).

Hot-Mix Asphalt Surface

Base Course (Minimum CBR=80)

Subbase (Minimum CBR=20)

Frost Protection (As Appropriate)

 Asphalt surface layer

Material first dumped Material after being

Civil Engineering - Texas Tech

A g g reg ates Laser p ro filing Im ag e creatio n

Q uality rep o rt C lassificatio n W avelet A nalysis

Fiber Optic Motion Sensor

(0, b, c)  dV   dxdydz

• Compaction, or density testing can be a tricky

Standard Proctor Modified Proctor

Calculated Curve Points

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ )‪(Highway Construction Stages‬‬

‫أوﻻ‪ 1-‬اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫أوﻻ‪ 2-‬اﻹﺧﻼء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺤﻀﺮﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺸﻂ‪:‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ 2-‬أﻋﻤﺎل دﻓﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮق‪:‬‬

‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺤﺎدﻻت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺤﺪل اﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺠﻮﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(water table‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻤﺎم اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺮﻓﻖ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺣﺴﺎب اﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )‪(Sub-base‬‬

‫‪Selected Granular Material-Grade Requirements‬‬

‫‪ -3‬اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس‪:‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺮش ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﺳﺎس )‪:(Subbase Course‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺮﻃﻴﺐ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺤﺪل‪:‬‬

‫‪ -7‬اﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻤﻚ واﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻒ )‪(Curbstone‬‬

0.15 m Drainage hole through

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(Prime Coat‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻠﺖ ) ‪(Stabilized Base Course‬‬

Requirements for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement

‫‪Properties of Asphalt Concrete Mixtures‬‬

‫‪ -2‬اﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﺮش اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﻔﻠﺘﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺪل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‪:‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆدي إﻟﻰ رﻓﺾ اﻟﺨﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬

‫‪ – ٣‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ – ٤‬ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ )‪ (SL‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻭﻧﺔ )‪ (PL‬ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺃ ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﻟﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺝ )‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪٢‬ـ ﺏ )‬

‫‪ .٣‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫= ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ÷ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء‬‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪wet‬‬

‫‪ – ٦ – ٥‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ ، Unit Weight‬‬

‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻲ ‪ = RC‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪ /‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺔ ) ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ) ﻛﺠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ ٦‬ـ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟــﻭﺯﻥ‬

‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٥‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺱ ﺃﻧﺟﻠﻭﺱ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬